Ecdis Jan 701B

JAN-701B/901B
JAN-701B/901B
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : tmsc@jrc.co.jp
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : service@jrcams.nl
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : service@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JUL. 2008 Edition 2 JRC Printed in Japan
Cautions for High Voltage
High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally
harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very
dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service,
inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant
deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts
could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand
into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is
strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge
with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you
put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another
important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of
using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of
electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the
burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.
Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid
immediately.
Method of First-Aid Treatment
☆Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.
☆Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a
Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
＊Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
(4) Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
(5) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
(6) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.
Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

① (1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand.→①.
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial
respiration.
②
(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your
mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose→②.
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
→③.
③ (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

☆Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No
Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
＊Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard,
the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue
this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.
(1) Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand
over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you
can’t press to the extent the patient’s ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to
the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed about 2 cm (Repeat this
about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
(2) If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times and
then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. If two
first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 15 times,
and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this
sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
method).
(3) Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are
restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the
patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or
her warm while watching him or her carefully.
① ②
③ ④
Fig.2 Cardiac massage

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701B/901B ECDIS/Conning Display.

This equipment consists of ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information
System) and Conning Display.
This ECDIS meets the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime
Organization) and the IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to
improve safety, reduce fuel combustion, reduce voyage time and automate voyages.
● For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly
before use.
● Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
● This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701B)/1,920,000 (JAN-901B) or more TFTs
(Thin Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is
brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent
characteristic of the TFT display technology.
● The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.
v
● Before Operation ●
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are
shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safely
and correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other
persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such
indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in

danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is
neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this
indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated
correctly.
Examples of pictorial indication

The △ mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION (“Electric Shock” in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
The mark represents prohibition.

Detailed contents of the prohibited action (“Disassembling Prohibited” in
Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The ● mark represents instruction.

Detailed contents of the instruction (“Disconnect the power plug” in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
vi
● Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ●
Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.
Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.
Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electrical shock, or a malfunction
may occur.
In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact
our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an
electric shock or a malfunction.
In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from
an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one,
and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message “Position Shift” is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.
vii
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you
find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets
in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15
minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic sailing,
be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN]
key ).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.
Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.

After changing the setting, execute to exit “Navigation & Planning”.
Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on

their and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
viii
Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures
above 55°C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.
This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

● If no backup measures are taken, such as using another EDIS unit for
confirmation, be sure to use official marine charts together with this
equipment to make any navigational decision.
● This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against
such information from other sources.
Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
● Do not place any object on the operation panel.

Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
● Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
ix
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.
● To change over the mode from ECDIS to Conning Display, exit ECDIS
mode, and then, select Conning Display from Startup menu.
It takes some time for Conning Display to appear, and it is necessary,
therefore, to ensure the safety before changing the modes.
● Note that changing over the mode from ECDIS to Conning Display will
cancel the previous settings of ECDIS mode such as the chart scale and
on/off of the radar overlay. These settings should be readjusted when ECDIS
mode is used again.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).Use of

routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
During sailing, be sure to check own ship’s position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
x
Equipment Appearance
Stand-alone type (JAN-701B)
xi
Stand-alone type (JAN-901B)
xii
Flash-mount type
xiii
Glossary
AIS : Automatic Identification System
ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.
ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.
AUTHORIZATION CODE : Encryption key for C-MAP Ed.2. Supplied by C-MAP Norway.
AUTO SAIL : The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as
automatic sailing.
Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.
Cell Permit : A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,
PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of
Japan Coast Guard.
Chart Portfolio : Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.
C-MAP Ed.2 : C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.
CTS : Course to steer. Heading command.
COG : Course Over the Ground
Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.
Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.
DIST : Distance
DR : Dead Reckoning
EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines
ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System
ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.
ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD : Estimated Time of Departure
F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.
xiv
GC : Great Circle
HDG : Ship’s heading
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.
Publisher of ENC.
Import (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on
ECDIS.
Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints
LMT : Local Mean Time
LON : Longitude
Primary : Main positioning sensor.
PRIMAR STAVANGER : A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.
Range : An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.
RL : Rhumb Line
Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.
S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.
S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme
SA Certificate file : An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/
update of S-63 chart.
Scale : The display scale.
SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart
Ship-avoiding operation : To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,
regardless of the scheduled route.
SOG : Speed Over the Ground
Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.
TCS : Track Control Systems
UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
xv
Update (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the
imported chart.
Update CD : Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.
USER CODE : A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63
charts.
UTC : Universal Time, Coordinated
VRM : Variable Range Markers
WOL : Wheel Over Line
WOP : Wheel Over Point
WPT : Waypoint
WPT-WPT : The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.
XTD : Cross Track Distance
XTL : Cross Track Limit
xvi
Contents
PREFACE ......................................................................................................................................... v
● Before Operation ● ........................................................................................................................vi
● Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ● ...................................................................................vii
Glossary..........................................................................................................................................xiv
1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Function ...................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Features...................................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Components.............................................................................................................................1-5
1.4 Construction.............................................................................................................................1-6
1.5 System Configuration.............................................................................................................1-12
2 Names and Functions ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Function of Operation Panel and LCD brilliance control...........................................................2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)...............................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel.................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information ............................................................................. 2-8
2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status ......................................................... 2-10
2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status ................................................................................ 2-12
2.2.1.4 The setting of the route ......................................................................... 2-12
2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship.................................................. 2-13
2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP..................................................... 2-15
2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS............................................................... 2-16
2.2.1.8 Tools Panel ........................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel ......................................................................... 2-18
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar ................................................................................................ 2-19
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Menu Operation .......................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu.................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ........................................................................ 3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu.......................................................................... 3-5
3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu ................................................................. 3-8
3.1.2 Various Panels................................................................................................ 3-10
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters................................................................. 3-12
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard .................................................................... 3-12
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard .............................................................. 3-13
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input..................................................................................... 3-14
3.1.3.4 Character Input ..................................................................................... 3-16
3.2 General Flowchart..................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.1 General Flowchart .......................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing ....................................................................................... 3-18
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation ............................................................................................3-20
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]) .................................................................................... 3-20
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu............................................................................. 3-21
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)......................................... 3-22
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation..................................................................................... 3-24
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume...................................................... 3-24
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT]) ................................................... 3-28
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) .................................................... 3-30
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR]).......................................................... 3-37
3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display............................................................................... 3-40
3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF ........................................................................ 3-40
3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list ......................................................................... 3-41
3.3.9.3 Target Track .......................................................................................... 3-46
3.3.9.4 File operation ........................................................................................ 3-49
3.3.9.5 Display Received Message................................................................... 3-50
3.3.9.6 AIS sentence......................................................................................... 3-50
3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets................................................ 3-50
3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target ............................................................. 3-52
3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard)................................................................................. 3-53
3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive and DVD ................................. 3-55
3.4 Shifting the Chart ...................................................................................................................3-56
3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ...................................................... 3-56
3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor......................................................... 3-57
3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor ......................................................... 3-58
3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List] .................................................................... 3-58
3.4.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position .................................................... 3-59
3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....................................................................3-60
3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ........................... 3-60
3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................................... 3-61
3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....................................................... 3-62
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)......................................................... 3-63
3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...............................................................3-64
3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode.............................................................................................3-66
3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode ................................................................................... 3-69
3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode ................................................................................... 3-69
3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode ................................................................................... 3-70
3.8 My Port List ............................................................................................................................3-71
3.8.1 Adding to My Port List..................................................................................... 3-71
3.8.2 Deleting My Port List....................................................................................... 3-72
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)........................................................................................3-73
3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only) .......................................................................3-74
3.10.1 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)................................................... 3-74
3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) ............................................... 3-75
3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)........................................................... 3-76
3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) .......................................................... 3-77
3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) .............................................. 3-78
3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)............................................ 3-78
3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only) ................................................... 3-79
3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only) ............................. 3-80
3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) ...................................................................... 3-81
3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View)........................................3-85
3.11.1 Multi View Screen ......................................................................................... 3-86
3.11.2 Selecting an Area.......................................................................................... 3-87
3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................. 3-88
3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT ...............................................................................................3-89
3.12.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WPT Using the Display Panel .............................. 3-89
3.12.2 Distance Measurement................................................................................. 3-91
3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm ............................................................................................. 3-94
3.13 Displaying a User Map .........................................................................................................3-95
3.14 Reading Out Information on the Object................................................................................3-96
3.15 Operating EBL/VRM.............................................................................................................3-99
3.15.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel .......................................... 3-99
3.15.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu............................................ 3-104
3.15.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option.......................................................... 3-104
3.15.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM – EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)............................. 3-106
3.15.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM – EBL1 (EBL2)................................................... 3-107
3.15.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM – VRM1 (VRM2) ................................................ 3-107
3.15.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM – Move Origin1 (Move Origin2).......................... 3-108
3.15.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM – EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2) ................................ 3-108
3.15.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM – EBL1 (EBL2) ...................................................... 3-109
3.15.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM – VRM1 (VRM2).................................................... 3-109
3.15.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel............................................. 3-110
3.15.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel ................................3-111
3.15.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel ...............................3-111
3.15.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM .............................................. 3-112
3.15.4 Marker Setting ............................................................................................ 3-113
3.16 Running Fix........................................................................................................................ 3-114
3.17 Monitoring Dragging Anchor............................................................................................... 3-115
3.18 User-Marking/Highlighting.................................................................................................. 3-117
3.18.1 Marking the Event Mark.............................................................................. 3-117
3.18.2 Marking the Information Mark ..................................................................... 3-119
3.18.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ................................................................... 3-120
3.18.4 Highlight...................................................................................................... 3-121
3.19 EBL Maneuver ...................................................................................................................3-123
3.20 Cross Bearing ....................................................................................................................3-125
3.21 Inputting Clearing Lines .....................................................................................................3-127
3.22 LOP(Line Of Position) ........................................................................................................3-128
3.23 Acquisition Zone.................................................................................................................3-136
3.24 Multi Window......................................................................................................................3-138
3.24.1 Using the Analog Meter .............................................................................. 3-138
3.24.2 Other Multi Window display ........................................................................ 3-139
3.25 Cursor Auto Mode ..............................................................................................................3-141
3.26 Logbook .............................................................................................................................3-143
3.26.1 Displaying the Logbook .............................................................................. 3-143
3.26.2 Logbook Setting.......................................................................................... 3-150
3.27 Own Ship’s setting .............................................................................................................3-152
3.27.1 Own Ship Symbol ....................................................................................... 3-153
3.27.2 Vector Display at POSN1............................................................................ 3-154
3.27.3 Danger Detection Vector and …Sector....................................................... 3-155
3.27.4 Track and Time Label Display..................................................................... 3-157
3.27.5 Heading Line and Beam Line ..................................................................... 3-158
3.28 Chart Setting ......................................................................................................................3-159
3.28.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS............................................................... 3-159
3.28.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab ........................................................ 3-160
3.28.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab...................................................................... 3-168
3.28.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab...................................................................... 3-174
3.28.2 Other Chart Setting..................................................................................... 3-175
3.28.3 Save Chart Setting...................................................................................... 3-176
3.28.4 Chart Setting List ........................................................................................ 3-177
3.29 Chart Abbreviations............................................................................................................3-178
3.30 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart ....................................................................................3-179
3.31 Graphical Index ..................................................................................................................3-181
3.32 Setting Radar Options........................................................................................................3-183
3.32.1 Setting of RADAR ....................................................................................... 3-183
3.32.2 Adjusting RADAR Range and Bearing........................................................ 3-184
Adjust the RADAR Range and Bearing according to the following procedure. ...... 3-184
3.32.3 Adjusting of Noise Level ............................................................................. 3-186
3.33 AIS/TT Setting ....................................................................................................................3-188
3.33.1 AIS/Target Track Setting ............................................................................. 3-188
3.33.2 Association Setting ..................................................................................... 3-193
3.34 Shifting Own Ship Position.................................................................................................3-195
3.34.1 Shifting Using the Cursor ............................................................................ 3-197
3.34.2 Shifting by Entering the Position ................................................................. 3-198
3.34.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value .......................................................... 3-198
3.34.4 Canceling the Ship Offset ........................................................................... 3-198
3.35 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer)...............................................................3-199
3.36 Saving the Screen..............................................................................................................3-199
3.37 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the avigation & Planning) .............................................3-200
4 Route Planning ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Route Planning ........................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor ............................................................. 4-8
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode ................................................................................. 4-8
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ....................................... 4-9
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor..................................................... 4-14
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)................................................ 4-16
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) ......................................... 4-28
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files............................................................................ 4-29
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files............................................................................ 4-30
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor ....................................................... 4-32
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode ........................................................................... 4-32
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor) ...................................... 4-33
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ........................................... 4-37
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing) .......................................... 4-39
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor) ............................................. 4-51
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files............................................................................ 4-52
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files............................................................................ 4-53
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials ....................................... 4-54
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route...................................................................................................4-57
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart ....................................................................................... 4-57
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route ................................................................................ 4-58
5 Chart Editing ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Chart Edit Mode .......................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions ...................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu ........................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions............................................................................................... 5-8
5.3 User Map Editor Operation ......................................................................................................5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit ...................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map .................................................................. 5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map..................................................................... 5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map ............................................................................... 5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps............................................................................... 5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps............................................................................. 5-17
5.3.2.5 User Map Setting .................................................................................. 5-18
5.4 Manual Update Operation ......................................................................................................5-19
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update................................................................................... 5-19
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects................................................... 5-20
5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting ......................................................................... 5-23
5.5 Entering Objects.....................................................................................................................5-24
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types ................................................................................... 5-26
5.5.2 Entering Objects ............................................................................................. 5-27
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)........................... 5-40
6 Automatic Sailing ........................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Automatic Sailing System.........................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route .................................................. 6-2
6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route....................................................... 6-3
6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm ................................................................ 6-4
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing ...................................................................................................6-5
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation.....................................................................................................6-7
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT .................................................................... 6-8
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route........................................................... 6-9
6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route ............................................................. 6-10
6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing................................................................... 6-11
6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing ......................................................................... 6-12
7 Tools and Setting/ Serviceman Menu.......................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 File Manager ............................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 System Information ..................................................................................................................7-4
7.3 Operating Time ........................................................................................................................7-5
7.4 Color Test (ARCS Only) ...........................................................................................................7-6
7.5 Sensor .....................................................................................................................................7-7
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position......................................................... 7-7
7.5.2 Bearing Setting ................................................................................................. 7-8
7.5.3 Speed Setting ................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting ................................................................................. 7-9
7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting...................................................................... 7-10
7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting.................................................................................................... 7-11
7.7 Setting the User Key ..............................................................................................................7-12
7.8 Setting Date/Time ..................................................................................................................7-13
7.9 Clear Voyage Distance...........................................................................................................7-14
7.10 Setting the Alarm Options ....................................................................................................7-15
7.11 Radar Process Setting .........................................................................................................7-17
7.12 Language .............................................................................................................................7-17
7.13 Code Input ...........................................................................................................................7-18
7.14 Own ship’s Parameter Setting..............................................................................................7-19
7.14.1 Ship’s Parameter .......................................................................................... 7-19
7.14.2 CCRP Setting ............................................................................................... 7-20
7.15 Line Monitor .........................................................................................................................7-21
7.16 Adjust ...................................................................................................................................7-22
7.17 Installation Information .........................................................................................................7-22
7.18 TCS Maintenance ................................................................................................................7-23
7.19 Radar Initial Setup................................................................................................................7-24
7.20 Data Backup/Restore ...........................................................................................................7-25
7.20.1 How to backup the data ................................................................................ 7-25
7.20.2 How to restore the data ................................................................................ 7-26
8 Playback ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ..................................................................................................8-2
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data ................................................................................................8-6
9 Reference ................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Alarm Function .........................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information..............................................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart ..................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ........................................................... 9-9
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart............................................................. 9-10
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System..........................................................................................9-16
9.4 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations ......................................................................9-17
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.............................................................9-22
9.5.1 File Types ....................................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.2 File Names ..................................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.3 CSV File Data Structure.................................................................................. 9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files............................................................................................ 9-23
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files .................................................................................... 9-28
9.5.3.3 Logbook File ......................................................................................... 9-39
9.6 Display Symbols ....................................................................................................................9-43
9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS.........................................................................................9-64
10 Maintenance and Inspection ................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Confirming Alarm..................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)...................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale.................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables ......................................................................................................10-6
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input ....................................................................10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu ......................................................................................................10-8
10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance Menu ............................................ 10-8
10.5.2 Disk Information.......................................................................................... 10-10
10.5.2.1 Drive Information............................................................................... 10-10
10.5.2.2 File Information ................................................................................. 10-11
10.5.3 Backup / Restore ........................................................................................ 10-12
10.5.3.1 How to Backup from HDD to USB device ......................................... 10-12
10.5.3.2 How to Restore from USB device to HDD......................................... 10-14
10.5.4 Hardware Key Information .......................................................................... 10-16
10.5.5 CD Cleaner................................................................................................. 10-17
10.6 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................10-18
11 After-Sales Service.................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 Maintenance Service............................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts.......................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 When Asking for Service ...................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Checks and Inspection ......................................................................................................... 11-2
12 Disposal .................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Disposal of the Product ........................................................................................................12-2
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries...................................................................................................12-2
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module ......................................................................................................12-2
13 Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal .......................................................................................................13-2
Index ................................................................................................................................................. 1
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE ............. 3
Repair Request Form........................................................................................................................ 5
1
Overview
1-1
1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System)
functions conforming to the “ECDIS Performance Standards” adopted in Resolution A.817 at the general
assembly of the IMO. Consequently, this equipment can become the core of an integrated navigation
system (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports one-man bridge operation.
• Safe sailing
• Energy-saved sailing
ECDIS functions:
ECDIS
• Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
• Availability of S-57edition 3.0/3.1 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.2/Ed.3, and ARCS as chart
databases (when C-MAP Ed3 is used with the optional C-MAP Ed3 upgrade kit)
• Own ship’s track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
• Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS)
• ARPA target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
• Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional
radar overlay kit)
• True/Relative motion display
• North-up/Course-up display
• Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time
• Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
• Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
• Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ship’s speed
• Display symbols used to present chart information are presented in accordance with S-52 and its
appendices.
• Display specifications
Size: 19-inch color LCD (JAN-701B)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and
dusk Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO.
Navigation Planning
• Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes
Automatic sailing functions

• Route tracking
• Course change
1 Overview 1-2
Alarm functions
• Safety depth crossing alarm
• Dangerous areas crossing alarm
• Waypoint arrival alarm ECDIS
• XTD alarm
Logging functions
• Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
• Own ship’s playback using logged data
1-3 1 Overview
1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:
ECDIS functions:
• Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
• Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas
and the guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
• Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the
connected Navtex receiver
• Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
• Ease of user chart creation
• Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
• Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
• Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
• Creation of alternative route during voyage
• Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
• Playback function to check the voyage
• S-57 update portfolio
1 Overview 1-4
1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below. ECDIS
• Components
Name Model Quantity Comment

Bridge Display Terminal
(JAN-701B) NCD-2095 1 Main Unit
(JAN-901B) NCD-2096
(JAN-701B) NWZ-173-E
Display Panel 1 Included in the main unit
(JAN-901B) NWZ-170-E
Operation panel NCE-5163-E －
Processing (JAN-701B) NCD-1444 1 Included in the main unit
unit (JAN-901B) NCD-1445 1 Included in the main unit
Instruction Manual (Japanese) 7ZPNA4055 1
Instruction Manual (English) 7ZPNA4056 1
Analog Interface Kit 1 Option
Serial Interface Kit 1 Option
Radar overlay kit 1 Option
Optional keyboard 1
Canvas cover (JAN-701B) 1
(JAN-901B) 1
Lightproof hood Option
(JAN-701B) 1
CD Cleaner 1
Accessory Packing in 1box
FD Cleaner 1
1-5 1 Overview
1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.
Mass: Approx. 125 kg Cable Inlet
Warning label
NCD-2095 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701B) (UNIT: mm)
1 Overview 1-6
ECDIS
Mass: Approx. 150kg Cable Inlet
Warning label
NCD-2096 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901B) (UNIT: mm)
1-7 1 Overview
1 Overview
1-8
MASS:APPROX. 85kg
Flash-mount type
NCD-1444 Processing Unit (UNIT: mm)
MASS:APPROX. 10kg
1-9
Flash-mount type
NWZ-173-ET 19” LCD Unit (UNIT: mm)
1 Overview
ECDIS
1 Overview
MASS:APPROX. 25kg
1-10
Flash-mount type
NWZ-170-ET 23.1” LCD UNIT (UNIT: mm)
ECDIS
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg NCE-5163-E Operation Panel
1-11 1 Overview
1.5 System Configuration
The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.
/ CONNING
1 Overview 1-12
2
Names
and
Functions
2-1
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.
2.1 Function of Operation Panel

and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each
part on the operation panel.
○
1
○
3
○
2
○
4 ○
5 ○
6 ○
7 ○
8 ○
25
○
9 ○
10
○
23 ○
24 ○
26 ○
27
○
11 ○
14 ○
15 ○
16
○
12
○
13 ○
17 ○
18 ○
19
○
20 ○
21 ○
22
Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel
2 Names and Functions 2-2

Table 2.1 Names and Functions
No. Name Function
1 POWER Turns the power on.
2 PWR FAIL Indicates the AC power supply error.
(See 12.4 “The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.”)
3 PWR ACK Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.
ECDIS
(See 12.4 “The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.”)
4 VIDEO*1 Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.
*1
5 RAIN Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
*1
6 SEA Suppresses sea clutter.
*1
7 GAIN Adjusts receiver gain.
8 RANGE ＋ Range up.
－ Range down.
*2
9 TURN Starts turning.
10 ALARM ACK Press to acknowledge an alarm.
11 ROUTE PLAN Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).
12 DAY/NIGHT Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.
13 PANEL Dims the operation panel in five steps.
*1
14 RADAR Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.
15 AUTO SAIL*2 Starts/Stops auto sail.
16 MENU Display Menu title bar.
17 AIS/ARPA Selects AIS/ARPA display.
18 HOME Returns the own ship’s position into the display.
19 MOB MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.
When hold down for more than three seconds, MOB panel is closed.
20 USER One of the following user-registered functions is executed:
21 OPTION 1 (See 7.7 “Setting the User Key.”)
22 OPTION 2 - Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ship’s option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Displaying the port name list
- Changing the ARCS’s active panel
- Loading ARCS’s low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
- Saving Screen
- Saving chart option setting
- Displaying chart option setting list
- Changing S-57/C-MAP chart display BASE temporarily
23 EBL1/EBL2 Turns the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) ON/OFF, and operates the
EBL.
24 VRM1/VRM2 Turns the VRM (Variable Range Marker) ON/OFF, and operates the
VRM.
25 TRACK BALL The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position
designation, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu
designation, etc.
2-3 2 Names and Functions

Table 2.1 Names and Functions-- Continued
26 LEFT BUTTON Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.
Pressing the left button is written as “left-click” in this book.
27 RIGHT BUTTON Used for confirming alarms.
Pressing the right button is written as “right-click” in this book.
*1: Effective only when optional radar overlay kit is installed.

*2: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.
(2) LCD brilliance control

The screen’s brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screen’s brightness will be adjusted to an optimal
condition automatically.
• JAN-701B
Brilliance control
• JAN-901B
Brilliance control
Note:
• For JAN-901B, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screen’s brightness to an
optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, “AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE” will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.

2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)
The functions of the display of the ECDIS unit are described here.
The screen consists of three areas, the chart display area, TCS bar and display panel (information
display area). The menu title bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode. ECDIS
Menu title bar
North arrow mark

Chart Display area
TCS bar Display panel
Chart Display Area:

The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS
charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
• Your ship’s symbol and vector at the primary position
• Your ship’s symbol and vector at the secondary position
• Head line
• Primary position track and time label
• Secondary position track
• EBL/VRM markers
• RADAR echo
• Other ship symbols, vectors and ship’s track (when ARPA/AIS is installed)
• Etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.
Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that
will be frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.
Menu Title Bar:

When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

TCS Bar:
Information bar for Auto Sail. Most of the items in the TCS bar display a value by choosing route on the
Display Panel.
To WPT: Number of “To WPT”

Next WPT: Next number of “To WPT”
TTG: Estimated Time of Arrival at the “To WPT”
ETA: Speed to arrive at the “to WPT” by the planned time
XTD: XTD (Cross Track Distance)
XTL: XTL (Cross Track Limit)
• In XTD and XTL, displayed side of “P (Port side)” and “S (Starboard side)”.
NM/m: Selecting units of distance. This setting is applied to XTD and XTL.
CRS: Bearing from “To WPT” to “Next WPT”
Alarms: The number of alarm occurring now
Warnings: The number of warning occurring now

2.2.1 Display Panel
The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or
ARCS. The following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS
ECDIS
Own Ship Information; See 2.2.1.1.
The other ship displaying status; See 2.2.1.2.
Auto sailing status. See 2.2.1.3.
The setting of a route and the display of the WPT

information; See 2.2.1.4
The other information on the own ship; See 2.2.1.5
Chart information: The item depends on ARCS chart and

other chart.
ARCS Chart: See 2.2.1.7
S-57/C-MAP: See 2.2.1.6
Tools and Brilliance Setting; It changes a display at

the arrow button.
Tools: See 2.2.1.8
Brilliance: See 2.2.1.9
The alarm which occurs at present can be confirmed.

Besides, you can do acknowledge of the alarm and
display of the alarm list. See 3.3.7
Bearing and distance from cursor to The position of cursor.

own ship. Latitude / Longitude

2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information
1) The Basic Information
Chosen CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point): The picture freeze indicator:
CCRP can be set in four (CCRP1-CCRP4) and chooses one This indicator is animating while the
in it. The CCRP setting can be changed with Serviceman screen-display is working normally.
menu [Serviceman] - [Installation] - [CCRP Setting].
Heading by HDG Sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.
Speed Through the Water by STW sensor:

are displayed.
Course Over the Ground and Speed Over the

Ground by primary sensor:
are displayed.
CCRP position by primary position sensor:
When the offset values are entered, the

background color is colored in sky blue.
Primary sensor information: It is fixing on "POSN1".
The name of the primary sensor is displayed.
Geodetic system name: It is fixing on "WGS-84".

If the geodetic system displays a chart except "WGS-84" at the
ARCS chart, the background changes to the sky blue.
It displays a current time.

･ By pushing the UTC/LMT button, the interval of UTC-LMT can be changed.
･ In case of UTC display, a time zone is displayed as + 00:00.
･ In case of LMT, a set value is displayed in the time zone.
･ The following item can change setting in menu [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] – [(3)Date/Time
Setting]
Date / Time / Time Zone (if manual setting)

Note:
The following item can change setting in menu [Main]-[Sensor].
・ Heading Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
・ STW Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
・ POSN1 (Primary sensor): It chooses from the connected equipment or Dead Reckoning.
・ POSN2: It isn't reflected in the display panel. POSN2 can set like POSN1, or unused.
ECDIS
・ Date and Time Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
・ Time Zone Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
The following table shows the relation of the sensor name of the display panel to the sensor setting
by POSN1.
POSN1 Sensor Input data Display name on Display name on
Setting COG and SOG position
DGPS1 GPS (GPS) GPS1
DGPS1 Differential GPS (GPS) DGPS1
DGPS2 GPS (GPS) GPS2
DGPS2 Differential GPS (GPS) DGPS2
GPS-Compass GPS-Compass (GPS) GPS-C
Loran-C Loran-C (Loran) LORAN-C
DR (Dead Reckoning) (DR) DR
2) CTS / Vector Time / Water Depth
CTS (Course to Steer):

It is displayed direction azimuth to be sending to Auto Sailing system.
It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.
Vector time:
It is displaying time for vector length; Ground-referenced
velocity and Water-referenced velocity.
Vector time can be set on menu [(4)Own Ship/Track] -
[(0)Setting].
Depth:
It displays water depth and the standard position from the Depth sensor.
The kind of the standard position: Transducer, Surface, Keel.

2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status
In case of setting to display on the chart about the other ship information, an information name is displayed
in this column.
The kind of device: display(Ex nomal Menu)
① RADAR 1 or RADAR 2 : [MENU]-[(7)Main] – [(9)Radar Overlay]- [(1)Radar 1] or[(2)Radar 2]
② TT1 (Target Track 1) : [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]–[(1)TT1] or [(4)All]
③ TT2 (Target Track 2) : [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]–[(2)TT1] or [(4)All]
④ AIS (Automatic Identification System) : [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]–[(3)AIS] or [(4)All]
Association Setting:
When Association Setting is valid, it integrates a target
① ② ③
with the same position of each of AIS and TT.
④
Association Setting can change validity by clicking this
item. While Association Setting is valid, the background
with this item becomes the color changes.
It does the detailed setting of Association Setting with

menu[MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]–[(0)Association Setting]..
If AIS is not use, Association Setting is disappeared.
Filter Setting:
It changes filter setting by AIS.
The shape of the filter has two kinds of "Ring" and "Sector". While Filiter Setting is valid, the background
with this item becomes the color changes.. The setting can be changed to each shape. When both
filters is invalid, AIS filter is not function.
The feature of the filter includes two kinds of [Priority]（displaying only within the limits) ,[Display](having
priority of display within the limits). It does the change of this setting and the other detailed setting with
menu [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]–[(0)AIS/TT Setting].
If AIS is not use, Association Setting is disappeared.

Other Ship Information displaying procedure:
① RADAR1 or RADAR2
When selecting [MENU]–[(7) Main]–[(9) Radar Overlay]–[(1)Radar 1], it is displayed with
[RADAR1].(Ex.normal Menu)
When selecting [MENU]–[(7) Main]–[(9) Radar Overlay]–[(2)Radar 2], it is displayed with
ECDIS
[RADAR2].(Ex.normal Menu).
It becomes blank when making the check of the radar which is removes a checked in [Radar
Overlay]..
[RADAR1] or [RADAR2] is as displayed even if it does an off center in the radar overlay and it makes
Radar Overlay off.
② ② TT1 (Target Track 1)

Following is displayed by "TT1" input data when selecting selecting [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
･ TT1(REL)
･ TT1(GND)
･ TT1(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
When using ground-speed stability of Internal TT.

[TT1-INT(GND) is displayed in ① box, and ② box is blank displayed.
When using through-the-water-speed of Internal TT.
[TT1-INT(SEA) is displayed in ① box, and ② box is blank displayed.
③ ③ TT2 (Target Track 2)

Following is displayed by "TT2" input data when selecting selecting [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
･ TT2(REL)
･ TT2(GND)
･ TT2(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
④ AIS
"AIS" is displayed when selecting [MENU]–[(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU]–[(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].

2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status
The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:
Displays the autopilot steering mode.

See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various steering modes.
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing

MAN: Manual turning mode
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing
AUTO: Auto turning mode
KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg
DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation
NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing

(The route has not been loaded, or a POS1, Gyro, Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
TCS: TCS type Auto Sailing
Note:
•To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.
2.2.1.4 The setting of the route

The setting of a route and the display of the WPT information
Route name being selected (“UNLOAD” appears if nothing is selected.

Drop-down list shows all route names.)
When clicking Route combo box, a drop down list of route files is displayed.
First line: File name
Second line: Comment of route file
Next waypoint being selected

(Drop-down list shows the selectable waypoints manually.)
When starting Auto Sail, the combo box can not be selected
from except WPT which is heading at current.
Bearing and Distance from the ship to the “To WPT”

2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship
CALC: (Actual Speed)
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)
Distance from the ship to the “to destined waypoint”

ECDIS
Actual Speed
Estimated Time of Arrival at the “to destined waypoint”
Speed to arrive at the “to destined waypoint” by the planned time
Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.
CALC: (Input ETA to calculation Average Speed)
Displays speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated

time of arrival
Setting of estimated time of arrival
CALC: (Input Average Speed to calculation ETA)
Setting of speed
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the destination No.
Drift:
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG

and HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG

and HDG vectors.
Route:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the final waypoint
Total sum of distance between the own ship and the starting WPT000.

WPT: Name of displayed WPT
Latitude of displayed WPT
Longitude of displayed WPT
Select from To / Next

To: Displays “To WPT”
Next: Displays Next to “To WPT”
Pair:
[Pair] tab isn't displayed when not using TCS type Auto Pilot.
Plan course, actual heading azimuth of own ship
are displayed.
Plan vessel speed, actual through the

water speed of own ship are displayed.
Plan turn course radius, order turn course

radius is displayed with “*.**”
When starting TCS-B, it displays a plan turn course radius in Plan and Actual.
When starting TCS-C, it displays a plan turn course radius and order turn course radius in Plan and
Actual.

2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP
When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.
When left-clicked, MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.
When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list. ECDIS
Selected port name position will be displayed on the chart.
The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level

selectable with the drop – down list button.
Base: Shows basic information such as geographic area.
(This is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
Standard: Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
Other: Shows all information.
!: Shows all objects that belong to standard information.
Scale of the chart being displayed

(Drop-down list shows all available scales.)
Range of the chart being displayed

(Drop-down list shows all available ranges).
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)

True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches the
predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic objects
move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ship’s movement.
Azmuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)

North Up: The chart always orients north.
Course Up: Your ship’s heading faces up on the screen.

(The chart rotates. After, the screen keeps the set direction.)
Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified amount using the degree
specifying box on this panel.
WPT Up: The direction from ship to “To WPT” always faces up on the screen.
(The chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)
Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth “Rotation”.
Home: Displays your ship on the screen.
Zoom In: You can magnify the range.

Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.
Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber band.

2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS
Note:
•Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME] buttons
is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.
Displays the geodetic system of the chart.
Scale Of the chart being displayed
Range of the chart being displayed
Displays the original scale of the chart.
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the geographic
objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ship’s movement.
Chart offset values
Opens the “Select Chart” panel. You can select the ARCS
chart you want.

2.2.1.8 Tools Panel
Refter to 3.15.3
Units of distance switch button
Azimuth of EBL switch button
When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
T: True North mode
[NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] -> … ECDIS
R: Bearing Reference mode
Tool area switch button
Displaying position of cross point

on EBL1 and VRM1

on EBL2 and VRM2
Base point mode switch button

[Blank]: CCRP mode
D: Dropped point mode
Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 switch button

Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Inactive: Displaying “OFF”
Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 switch button

Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
EBL1/EBL2 edit mode switch button

Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
VRM1/VRM2 edit mode switch button

Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.

2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel
Refter to 3.3.5.
Tool area switch button
Day-Night level switch button

When left-click, display level is changed.
[DAY1]-> [DAY2]-> [DAY3]-> [DUSK]->
[NIGHT]-> [DUSK]-> [DAY3]…
AIS/Tracked Target brightness switch button

Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.
Video brightness switch button (In using radar)

Operation panel light brightness switch button


2.2.2 Menu Title Bar
When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens and you can access to various
menus.
ECDIS
The following shows the menu trees:
Table 2.2 Menu Tree

Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.2
(2) TT2 3.3.9.2
(3) AIS 3.3.9.2
(4) All 3.3.9.2
(5) Deactive All AIS 3.3.9.9
(6) All List 3.3.9.4
(7) Select List 3.3.9.10
(8) Target Track (1) Target Track Setting… 3.3.9.5
(2) File Operation… 3.3.9.6
(9) Own Ship’s AIS Data 3.3.9.4
(1) Message (1)Addressed Message 3.3.9.7
(2)Broadcast Message 3.3.9.7
(0) AIS Sentence (1) VDM 3.3.9.8
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.8
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.8
(0) AIS/TT Setting… 3.33.1
(0) Association Setting… 3.33.2
(2) Route (1) Route Planning (1) Table Editor 4.1.2
(2) Graphic Editor 4.1.3
(2) Create Alternate Route 4.2
(3) Distance Measurement 3.12.2
(4) Use XTD Alarm 3.12.3
(0) Setting… 4.1.1
(3) Auto Sail (1) Start 6.3.2
(2) Stop 6.3.3
(0) Setting… 6.2
(4) Ownship/Track (1) Adjust (1) Cursor 3.34.1
(2) Enter Position… 3.34.2
(3) Enter Offset… 3.34.3
(4) Clear Offset 3.34.4

Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued
(4) Ownship/Track (2) Anchor Watch (1) Create Monitoring Circle 3.17
(2) Clear Monitoring Circle 3.17
(0) Setting… 3.27
(5) User Map (1) Select User Map… 3.13
(2) Unselect User Map 3.13
(3) User Map Editor 5.3
(6) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event Mark 3.18.1
(2) Information Mark 3.18.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.18.3
(4) Highlight 3.18.4
(5) Delete Event Mark 3.18.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.4
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List 3.8.1
(2) My Port List 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting 3.28.3
(4) Chart Setting List 3.28.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates 3.30
(7) Graphical Index 3.31
(8) Manual Update 5.4
(1) Multi View (1) Single View 3.11.1
(2) Top Bottom 3.11.1
(3) Right Left 3.11.1
(4) Right Top View 3.11.1
(5) Left Top View 3.11.1
(6) Right Bottom View 3.11.1
(7) Left Bottom View 3.11.1
(8) Select Area 3.11.2
(9) Wide Range View 3.11.3
(2) Chart Portfolio (1) Create 8.1
(2) Top Window 8.2
(3) Chart Abbreviation 3.29
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary 3.10.9
(2) Adjust Datum Offset 3.10.10
(3) Datum Transformation 3.10.10
(5) Setting (1) S-57/ C-MAP/ARCS 3.28.1
(2) Other Chart 3.28.2
(7) Main (1) EBL Maneuver
3.19
/Remove EBL Maneuver
(2) Cross Bearing… 3.20
(3) Create Clearing Line (1) Not Less Than 3.21
(2) Not More Than 3.21

(7) Main (4) LOP (1)Create Lop 3.22
(2)Delete All LOP 3.22
(5) Print 3.35
(6) Save Screen 3.36
(7) Logbook 3.26.1 ECDIS
(8) Multi Window (1) PreSet 3.24.2
(2) Analog Meter 3.24.1
(3) Climate 3.24.2
(4) Draft 3.24.2
(5) Current Wind 3.24.2
(6) Course Rudder Graph 3.24.2
(7) Course Bar 3.24.2
(8) Ship 3.24.2
(9) Engine Graph 3.24.2
(5) Wind Graph 3.24.2
(6) TEMP Graph Setting 3.24.2
(7) PreSet Save 3.24.2
(0) Option… 3.24.2
(9) Radar Overlay (1) Radar1 3.3.8
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Ring 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
(0) Setting… 7.11
(1) Make AZ… 3.23
(2) File Manager 7.1
(3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(2) System Information 7.2
(3) Operating Time 7.3
(4) ARCS Color Test 7.4
(4) Sensor… 7.5
(5) Code Input 7.13
(0) Setting… (1) Color and Brilliance Setting… 7.6
(2) Option Key Setting… 7.7
(3) Date/Time Setting… 7.8
(4) Marker Setting… 3.15.2.1
(5) Logbook Setting… 3.26.2
(6) Voyage Distance Clear 7.9
(7) Display Panel Setting… 3.24
(8) Alarm Setting… 7.10
(9) Radar Process Setting… 7.11
(1) Language 7.12
(0) Buzzer Volume… 3.3.5
(0) INS Setting
(0) Exit 3.37

(1) Serviceman (1) Line Monitor 7.15
(2) Adjust 7.16
(3) Installation (1) Installation Information 7.17
(2) CCRP Setting 7.14.2
(4) Ship's Parameter 7.14.1
(5) TCS Maintenance… 7.18
(6) Radar Initial Setup… 7.19
(7) Data Backup/Restore (1) Backup 7.20.1
(2) Restore 7.20.2
(0) Exit Serviceman Menu

Context Menu
Main Menu Submenu Reference
Abort 3.1.1.3
Activate AIS 3.3.9
Deactivate AIS 3.3.9
TGT Data 3.3.9
ECDIS
Cancel TGT Data 3.3.9
TGT Property 3.3.9
S-57/C-MAP /ARCS Information 3.14
Other Information 3.13
Auto mode 3.25
Zoom Area 3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.15.2.2
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.2
EBL1 3.15.2.3
EBL2 3.15.2.3
VRM1 3.15.2.4
VRM2 3.15.2.4
Move Origin1 3.15.2.5
CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.15.2.6
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.6
EBL1 3.15.2.7
EBL2 3.15.2.7
VRM1 3.15.2.8
VRM2 3.15.2.8
Running Fix / Remove Running Fix 3.16
High Resolution Area 3.10.1
Load Low Resolution 3.10.6
Select Chart Under Cursor 3.10.3
Change Active Panel 3.10.5
Note and Diagram 3.10.8

3
Basic
Operation
of ECDIS
3-1
● Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
● Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as
[xxxx] in this book.
Example:
• [RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
• [MENU] button (on the display panel)
• [(1) Cursor] (menu name)
(2) Menu operation description:

The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:。
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
• You will learn how to access to a menu later.
Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 “Menu
Operation”.
The flowchart described in 3.2 “General Flowchart” will give you general procedure for this
equipment.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-2

3.1 Menu Operation
To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here. Also,
major panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers and letters
are described. ECDIS
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu

3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball
Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball:
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the
Trackball
screen for position designation, selection of buttons
(Moves the cursor.)
on the display panel, menu designation, etc.
Left button:
Left button Right button Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart,
(Left-click) (Right-click) or selecting a button, menus and options on the
screen. Pressing the left button is written as
“left-click” in this book.
Right button (context menu selection button):

Used for displaying a context menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as “right-click” in
this book.
3-3 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Major cursors
Cross Cursor Lens Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart. Appears when area zoom function is
Marking Cursor selected. The rubber band can be
drawn to magnify an area.
Appears while operation in following Hand Cursor

modes. Appears when the cursor is moved
・Information Mark while pressing and holding down the
left button in the chart area. You can
・Tidal Stream Mark
grip and move the chart freely.
・Highlight
・LOP Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart
while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Edit Cursor
Update mode and Route Graphic
Appears while moving object in User mode.
Map Editor/ Manual Update and
Route Graphic mode. Used to change
objects and WPTs.
Arrow Cursor (Pointer) OffSt Offset Cursor

Indicates the position on the display Appears while setting offset in Adjust
panel, menu title bar and panel Cursor mode.
(dialogue box, etc.)
Select Chart Under Cursor (ARCS) Auto Mode Cursor
? Appears while select chart in following

mode.
In each of the following modes, it
changes to the cursor with the angle.
・Click EBL/VRM line and operating
・Select Chart Under Cursor
・Click AIS Filter line and operating
(ARCS Only)
・Click AZ Function line and operating
EBL/VRM Setting Cursor

Appears while setting EBL/VRM in
context menu.

3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu
As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:

(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
ECDIS
(3) Selecting the submenu/options
(1) Opening the menu

For opening the menu, move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
[Menu Title Bar]
How to close the menu:

Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

(2) Selecting [(6) Chart] ([MENU] - [(6) Chart])
Select the [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.
Step-by-step operation to select [(6) Chart] menu:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(6) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(6) Chart] menu will open.
Explained as “Left-click [(6) Chart]”.
The [(6) Chart] menu opens.

(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]
1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the “Location/Attribute” panel will open.
Shifting the cursor

will also open the
submenu. ECDIS
How to Close the Panel:

Left-click the [OK] or [Cancel].
[OK]: Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]: Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.

3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu
You may use the context menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).
Example : By right-clicking on the chart display
Right-clicking the chart may

open a context menu.
Left-click a menu item you want.
e.g. “Zoom Area”.

Note:
In case of various operations which used the cursor, the operation can be aborted by choosing
"Abort" of the context menu.
Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.
ECDIS
Left-click “Abort” to abort the current COG:

3.1.2 Various Panels
The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.
Value entry box

You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the entry box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry
box, if any, or the [ENT] key.
Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the
dropdown list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.
Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 “How to Enter Numbers and Letters”.

Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.
Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
ECDIS
The check mark (✔) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.
Option button (Radio button)

You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark shows the
selected item.
List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark ( ✔ ) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.
To scroll up/down the list:

• Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
• While left-clicking the scroll bar, move
the trackball so that it moves upward or
downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right

side or at the bottom of the panel.
Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.

3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters
You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic
buttons on the display or optional full key board.
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard

Note:
• You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not
installed.
1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.
Screws (2 places)
2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.
Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.

3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard
To input data, you can use numerical keyboard or Like the PS/2 keyboard.
By the column, the kind of the keyboard is changes.
Numerical keyboard:
Left-click to value entry box, numerical keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.3 Numerical Input)
ECDIS
(Input a number) (Input latitude) (Input the time)
Like the PS/2 keyboard:

Left-click to text box, Like the PS/2 keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.4 Character Input)
(Input comments)

3.1.3.3 Numerical Input
This section explains the numerical input rules.
•Inputting number is displayed value entry box.

•The function of each button is as follows.
[1] ~ [9], [0]: Input number is displayed right side that likes an electronic calculator.
[+]/[-], [N]/[S], [E]/[W]: Change contents except a number.
“Plus” / “Minus”, “North” / “South”, “East” / “West”
[CLR]: Clear the inputted value, and display default value.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data, and close the software keyboard.
[Close]: Clear the inputted value and returns to default value, and close the software keyboard.
Example of inputting the numeric “43°34.187’S” on LAT:

1) Left-Click on the LAT column. The software keyboard is displayed.
LAT column is displayed default value.
2) Input [4] on software keyboard. Inputting value is displayed LAT.
[4]
3) Similarly, input on software keyboard as follows.
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[8]
[7]

4) After inputting [LAT], left click the [S] bottom.
ECDIS
5) Input [ENT] on software keyboard, the software keyboard is closed and the input data is fixed.

3.1.3.4 Character Input
This section explains the character input rules.
•Inputting character is displayed on software keyboard. When fix data, the text area is entered the data.
•The input character is displayed behind a character cursor. The character cursor is moved by “<-”, “->” key
or left-clicking on input area.
•The function of each button is as follows.
Alphanumeric key, Symbol key: Input character behind a character cursor on input area.
[Space]: Input space behind a character cursor on input area.
[BS]: Delete character before a character cursor.
[<-]: Move character cursor to the left.
[->]: Move character cursor to the right.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data. Then the software keyboard is closed and the text area is entered the
data.
[Close]: Clear the inputted text, and close the software keyboard. The text area is displayed default
data.
•The following button is changed to arrangement of software keyboard.
[abc]: Input the lowercase characters.
[ABC]: Input the uppercase characters.
[!”#]: Input the symbol characters.
[Align]: In the setting [abc] or [ABC], change to arrange the software keyboard.
QWERTY or alphabetization
Example of inputting the characters “Note 1”:

Text box
1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, press the [ABC] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is uppercase
characters.
3) Press the [N] key to input [N].
Character cursor
4) Press the [abc] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is lowercase characters.
5) Press the [o] button to input “o.”
6) Press the [t] button to input “t.”
7) Press the [e] button to input “e.”
8) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENT] key to fix the entry.
1

3.2 General Flowchart
The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-701B/901B and the flowchart for sailing.
3.2.1 General Flowchart

[Startup Menu] [Startup Screen]
Power switch ON
ECDIS
Select [Navigation &

Planning] in Startup Menu
Startup Screen
Input ARCS PIN

(ARCS only)
Navigation & Planning [Navigation & Planning Screen]

Screen
Adjustments
[Navigation & Planning] will be Display panel
•Screen brightness
automatically displayed if [ ] is (Information
•Operation panel brightness
left- clicked or no operation is display area)
•Sound volume
conducted for 10 seconds.
•Radar overlay, etc.
(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 “Flowchart for

Sailing Sailing”.)
(From the [MENU])

Selects [Route]
Operation panel
Selects [To WPT]
operation Route Planning
• Table editing
• Graphical editing
Display panel • Create alternate route
Sailing monitoring operation
• Alarm monitor
Chart Editing
(Arrival, Route, etc.)
• User Map editor
Menu operation • Manual Update
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 only)
Press the [POWER] key

Exit and shutdown
on the operation panel
Power switch OFF

3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing
Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be
Sailing start
heard. Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the
[ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] on the
display panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see
3.3.7 “How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])”.)
• Select the [Route] you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
Select [Route] shown.)
Select [To WPT] • Select the [To WPT] (for example “1” or “Auto Select”).
Move you ship to the sea • Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.
Ship's bearing
To WPT Your ship's symbol
Note:
•Be sure that the background color is not sky
blue. If it is sky blue, your ship position is
shifted by the offset function. In this case,
return its color to gray. See, 3.34.4 “Canceling
Bearing to the To WPT
the Ship Offset”.
Next Page
About Auto Sailing:

You can use automatic sailing when using together with the Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see
chapter 6 “Automatic Sailing”.

Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued
The sequel from the

pre-page
• When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated next
WPT, and an “Arrived at WPT” alarm occurs.
Route monitoring After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
("Arrived at WPT" alarm operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
occurs when arrived at the panel to stop the alarm. ECDIS
WPT.)
[Alarm Acknowledgement] button

It repeats itself until the
ship arrives at the last
WPT before the final
destination.
When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination, "Arrived at
Arrived at the final destination
("Arrived at LAST WPT" alarm LAST WPT" alarm will occur.
occurs.) After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
panel to stop the alarm.
Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
Unload the route
End of sailing

3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation
How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination
sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER])

On the operation panel
Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the startup menu will be
displayed.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting

3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be
displayed.
You can select one of items.
●Navigation & Planning
If [ ] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen will
be displayed.
●Chart Portfolio
ECDIS
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will
open the chart portfolio screen. (See attached “Chart
Portfolio”.)
●Playback
The sailed passage can be replayed by the Playback
feature. When left-clicking this menu, Playback screen is
displayed.(See chapter 8 “Playback”.)
●Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 “Color
Pattern (S-57)”)
●Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2
“Gray Scale”)
[Startup Menu]
Note:
• [Navigation & Planning] will be automatically
displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.

3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS
Only)
1) If ARCS has been installed, the “ARCS PIN” panel will be displayed after [Navigation & Planning]
is selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button. The
[Startup screen] will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is
left-clicked on the “ARCS PIN” panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS has
not been installed, however, the “ARCS PIN” panel will not be displayed. The [Startup screen]
will be displayed instead.
Note:
• ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the “ARCS PIN”
panel.
• ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the “ARCS PIN”
panel.
• The “ARCS PIN” panel is displayed only
once after [Navigation & Planning] is
selected.
To show the “ARCS PIN” panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
• ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.
Note:
• Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
• Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.
[Startup Screen]

2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a short
while.
[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]
ECDIS

3.3.4 Power OFF Operation
Press the [POWER] key.
The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.
[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit
Note:
• If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, gray screen will be displayed about
20 seconds, but the power will eventually be turn off.
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume

Perform the following adjustments as required.
(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])

Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.
• JAN-701B • JAN-901B
Brilliance control
Brilliance control

(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])
Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the operation panel brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.
Menu operation: ECDIS
1) In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
In the User Chart editing menu
The “Color and Brilliance Setting” dialog will appear.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed in [Keyboard] of [Brilliance].
Tool area on display panel operation:

1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed by left-clicking the panel brightness switch button.
Panel brightness
switch button
Each time you left-click the button, The operation panel brightness changes.
(3) Brightness of the radar overlay image ([VID])
Menu operation:
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Rader Video] of [Brilliance].

1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch.
2) The brightness of Radar overlay image is changed by left-clicking the Video brightness switch .
Video brightness switch
Each time you press the key, the brightness of Radar overlay image changes.
(4) Brightness of the AIS/TT target symbol ([TGT])
Menu operation:
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Target Symbol] of [Brilliance].

1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The panel brightness of target symbol is changed by left-clicking the [TGT] button.
[TGT] button
Each time you press the key, the brightness of target symbol changes.
(5) Volume Adjustment

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
The “Buzzer Volume” panel will appear.

2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by moving the scroll bar of each alarm type. *1
3) To fix the changed setting and to close the panel, press “OK”. When pressing “Cancel” , the panel
is closed and the setting returns to the original condition.
*1 The volume of lift click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.
Explanation and example of alarm type (Refer to 10.1 Alarm function)

Alarm Type Explanation Example (Alarm message) ECDIS
System Alarm Communication connection error and POSN 1(Data)

hardware error POSN1 shifted
AC offline
Operation Miss Specifying an unrelated place No Object
Exceeding the number of displays of Not Allowed
AIS/TT AIS 95% Capacity
Key ACK Operating the key to the operation panel (Pushing [ALARM ACK] key)
Setting Alarm The initialization of ECDIS is insufficient Safety contour not set
Safety depth not set
Navigation Alarm – Urgent warning on auto sail Call-back navigator
High
Navigation Alarm – Nearing a dangerous object and an area Crossing Safety Contour
Mid Encountered abnormality of sailing Approaching Wreck
Dragging anchor
Navigation Alarm – A variety of alarms of the others except Timer
Low the above. CPA/TCPA
Loaded different datum chart

3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])
You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the
bridge. Select one of the following display colors
● DAY1 (Day Bright)
● DAY2 (Day Whiteback) For S-57/C-MAP only
● DAY3 (Day Blackback)
● DUSK (Dusk) For S-57/C-MAP only
● NIGHT (Night)
Key operation:
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
The order with which the display color switches over to:
“DAY3”-“DAY2”-“DAY1”-“DUSK”-“NIGHT”-“DUSK”-“DAY1”-“DAY2”-“DAY3”-“DAY2”-...
Note: When leaving for 3 seconds from the operation when operating from the darker one to the
lighter one, next key operation becomes operation from the lighter one to the darker one.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order, and
then select one of items you want.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order
Day-Night level
“Day Bright”
“Day Whiteback” (S-57/C-MAP)
“Day Blackback”
“Dusk” (S-57/C-MAP)
“Night”
When you select the level in "Day/Night" list and push [OK] or [Apply] button, the display color of
the screen will be changed.

1) Tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) Display color is changed by [Day-Night level] switch button.
[Day-Night level] switch button
Each time you press the key, the display color changes. The order which a display color switches ECDIS
over to is the same as the key operation. (Refer to "Key operation".)

Note:
• When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed
information difficult to read/see.

3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])
When the alarm occurs, the buzzer sounds and the alarm contents are displayed in the alarm display
area on the display panel to notify the operator of an alarm. When more than one alarm occurs, it changes
an alarm display every second.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or
left-click the alarm acknowledge-button on the display panel to acknowledge the alarm. When confirming
an alarm, the buzzer sound stops and the alarm display disappears from the alarm acknowledge-button.
However, until the cause of the alarm is removed, in the alarm display area, the alarm maintains a
displayed condition.
[Alarm List] button displays the alarm record which occurred recently. When you want to see the alarm
which occurred in the past, it chooses "Logbook" from the menu. (See 3.26 “Logbook”)
The alarm acknowledge-button [Alarm List]

botton
The alarm display area
Memo: For alarm settings, see 7.10 “Setting the Alarm Options”.
(1) When no alarm is found

If no alarm is found, the alarm display area displays [No Alarm].
Nothing is displayed here.
Displaying [No Alarm]
(2) When an alarm occurs

An alarm is displayed at the alarm acknowledge-button and in the alarm display area and the alarm
sound sounds.
Displaying the alarm
Blinking every 0.5 seconds
Displaying the alarm

(3) Acknowledging and canceling of the alarm (Stopping the alarm sound)
Notes:
Until it confirms the cause of the alarm, don't acknowledge an alarm.
1) The procedure of the alarm acknowledgement operation

Press the [ALARM ACK] key. ECDIS
On the display panel

Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.
The alarm sound stops and the alarm display on the alarm acknowledge-button disappears.
However, in the alarm display area, it maintains the condition which the alarm occurred to.
To erase an alarm from the alarm display area, the problem which the alarm generated must
be solved.
No Alarm
Alarm occurs
Ex: The communication error occurs in POSN1.
The Alarm occurrence condition
(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound sounds.
Blinking the alarm
Displaying the alarm Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.
Or, press key.

The Alarm occurrence condition
(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound stops

Disappearing the alarm
Resolved the occurring alarm

Maintaining the alarm displaying.
Ex.: The communication of POSN1 becomes
possible.
No Alarm
2) If two or more alarms have occurred, the display of the alarm acknowledge-button and the
display of the alarm display area is displaying alarm contents changed every second. When
acknowledging alarm, the acknowledgement operation is done about the displayed alarm when
operating.

(4) Displaying the alarm list
1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the “Alarm List” panel opens.
• If you open the “Alarm List” panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the “Alarm List”
also blinks.
After confirmation, you can acknowledge the blinking alarm by left-clicking the [ACK] button.
You can also open the “Alarm List” panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.

2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Alarm List” panel.
* When opening Alarm List once again, the tab to have been selecting last opens.
Detailed Alarm List refers to "9.1Alarm Function".
Icon blinks in red: Title of the tab displaying red:

The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet. Some alarm in the tab occurs.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.
ECDIS
No Icon: Icon in green: ACK button in red, and blinking words:

The alarm does not No alarm. Some alarm occurs and there are not acknowledged yet.
occur in the current ACK button in red, and displaying words:
system configuration. Some alarm occurs and all alarms are acknowledged.
ACK button in green:
No alarm.

[System Alarm Status] tab:
[System alarm status] is the alarm list of the hardware error and the communication error.
[System alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
・No.1 Position Data Alarm
・No.2 Position Data Alarm
・No.1 Position Shift Alarm
・Position Difference Alarm
・Radar Data Alarm
・Target Data Track Alarm
・Gyro Data Alarm
・Log Data Alarm
・Autopilot Data Alarm
・Hardware Alarm
[NAV. Alarm Status] tab:

[NAV. alarm status] is the list of the alarm which needs to solve when occurring during navigation.
[NAV. alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
・Safety contour Alarm
・Dangerous Alarm
・Route Monitoring Alarm
・Target Alarm
・LAT. Limit Over Alarm
・Anchor Alarm
・Chart Alarm
・ARCS Alarm
・Area Alarm
[INFO/Warning] tab:
[INFO/Warning] is the list of the “Information” and “Warning”.
・"Information" alarm occurs when not doing the initial setting. Alarm icon color is in blue when
occurring.
・"Warning" alarm occurs when become condition that it should be careful of the sailing.
Alarm icon color is in yellow when occurring. "Warning" alarm is not need to acknowledge.
However, the alarm is displayed in the alarm display area during the occurrence.

(5) Displaying the alarm Log table
You can display the alarm Log on the sailing.
Note:
• The alarm history is displayed only latest 20 items. To check the past alarm lists, see 3.26
“Logbook”.
Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu ECDIS
Select the “System Alarm Log“ tab or “NAV.Alarm Log“ tab after open the “Alarm List” panel.

2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Alarm List” panel.
Alarm: Detected: Acknowledge: Removed*:
Displaying alarm Displaying date when Displaying date when the Displaying date when
contents the alarm occurred. alarm acknowledged. the alarm removed.
Icon blinks in red:

The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing. All Clear:
No Icon: Erase all displays of the alarm
The alarm is removed. except for the occurring alarm
*When switching off the power without acknowledge behind the alarm, all alarms are removed.

3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])
You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on the
operation panel.
Note:
• To display a radar image, the optional radar board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar
image must be sent from the radar system.
• It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by “Chart Portfolio”. ECDIS
• If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
• While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/
12/24/48/96/120nm).
• If Display Color is [DAY1] or [DAY2], Display Color changes [DAY3] when radar display turn on.
• For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.
Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.32 1“Setting Radar Options”
(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When Radar2 is displayed, the echo of Radar2 becomes hidden.
Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:

Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When [Radar1] is displayed, the echo of Radar1 becomes hidden.

Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.
Turning ON/OFF the Bearing Scale:

1) It makes a Radar1 or Radar2 valid.
Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Bearing Scale] in that order.
Each time you left-click [Bearing Scale], the bearing scale display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [Bearing Scale].
The bearing scale will be superimposed on the chart.
(2) Radar Overlay Setting from the menu

Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Setting] in that order.
[Radar Overlay Setting] panel is displayed.
The following item can be adjusted:
[Gain]: Gain can be adjusted.
[Sea]: Sea can be adjusted.
[Rain]: Rain can be adjusted.
[Video]: Video can be adjusted.
Radar echo adjustment screen closes when left-click the [Close] button.
(3) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel

Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.

(4) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)
Note:
• If menu panel adjustment ([(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] “Rader Option”
panel) is selected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to
activate the dials. For details, see 3.32.1 “Setting Radar Options”.
[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes

The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right
ECDIS
increases the brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.
[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter

The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images
of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces
sea clutter. So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial
turned as far as possible to the left.
[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter

The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the
[SEA] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small
boats.
[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity

The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right
increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be
observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.

3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display
You can turn ON/OFF the AIS/TT target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the
menu.
Note:
• TT information is displayed only when it is received from the TT device system.
• AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS device system.
• For AIS/TTtarget settings, (see 3.33 .1“AIS/TT Setting”).
3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF

(1) AIS/TT display ON/OFF using the operation panel
Press the [AIS/ARPA] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.
(2) AIS/TT display ON/OFF from the menu

"TT 1" "TT 2" "AIS" can be independently selected. Selecting [All] can turns ON/OFF "TT 1" "TT 2"
"AIS" displays at the same time.

Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
Each time you select [(1) TT1], [(2) TT2], or [(3) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(4) All], items [(1) TT1] [(2) TT2] [(3) AIS] are simultaneously turned ON/OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached.
(3) Built-in of co-processor

Internal TT target is displayed on the Chart.

3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list
Note that the items “Bearing”, “Distance”, “CPA” ,“TCPA” in the table are the filtered value by the
AIS/TT settings. （See 3.33.1 “AIS/TT Setting ”）.

Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
ECDIS
The “All List” panel opens.
2) Perform the following operation.
• Left-click one of the tabs, to open the “TT1” or “TT2” or “AIS” list.
When you opened “AIS” tab, the [View AIS Detail] becomes active.
• Left-click the [Close] to close the “All List” panel.
3) AIS Filter
• It is displayed according to the display range item which was set in AIS filter.
（See 3.33.1 “AIS/TT Setting ”）.

List items:
The items are the same for "TT1" "TT2" "AIS". The P1, P2, etc. are the target number.
• Bearing: Bearing to the AIS/TT target
• Range: Distance to the AIS/TT target
• Heading: Heading of the AIS/TT target
• COG: Course of the AIS/TT target
• SOG: Speed of the AIS/TT target
• Position: Position of the AIS/TT target
• CPA: Closest Point of Approach
• TCPA: Time to Closest Point of Approach
• Status: Status of the AIS/TT target
[View AIS Detail] button function:

You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this [View AIS Detail], the “AIS Information” panel will open.
• Left-click the [Close] to close the “AIS Information” panel.
[The item of AIS Information]

・Target ID:
・Ship’s Name: Name of the AIS target ship
・MMSI: 9-digit unique user ID
・Status: Sleeping / Activated / Lost
・NAV Status up to 10 characters
0: Under Way Using Engine: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
ECDIS
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined
・Call Sign: Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)

・IMO No.: 9-digit number
・CPA: Closest point of approach to the AIS target
・TCPA: Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
・Position Sensor: Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: NOT DEFINED
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C: Loran-C
5: Chayka: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System
7: Surveyed: Measuring type
8-15: Not used: Not used
・Position Accuracy: [>10m] / [<10m]

・Ship’s Type: Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer,
or a width of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A
vessel that is dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater
operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in
military operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment):
Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels
defined by the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
・Latitude: The latitude at which the AIS target is situated

・Longitude: The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
・Bearing: Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
・Range: Distance between own ship and the AIS target
・COG: Bearing of the AIS target
・SOG: Speed of the AIS target
・Length: Length of the AIS target
・Beam: Beam of the AIS target
・Draft: Draft of the AIS target
・Heading: Heading of the AIS target
・Rate of Turn: Turning speed of the AIS target
・Destination: Destination of the AIS target
・ETA: ETA of AIS target

Note:
The AIS system equipped on own ship also has the own ship's AIS data to transmit for another
ship. Own ship’s AIS data can be confirmed according to the following menu.
Select [MENU]–[(1)AIS/TT]–[(9)Own Ship’s AIS Data] in that order.(Ex.:normal menu）
ECDIS

3.3.9.3 Target Track
Maximum of 20 Target Track are displayed. When more than 20, it is erased from old Target Track.
Even if it changes [Target Memory Interval], the point which was displayed by the first setting is
displayed just as it is
When setting [Target Memory Interval] in the distance interval, it is displayed when moving the
distance that a movement except the straight line was specified.

Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order..
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order. [Target
Track Setting] panel is displayed.
Target Track can be displayed in a maximum of 20.
Check ON→Target Track is displayed. [Target Track Color & Display] panel is
Check OFF→Target Track is not displayed. displayed.
Target Track is displayed every [3sec] [5sec]

[10sec] [30sec] [1min] [3min] [5mim] [10min]
[30min] [60min] [1NM] [3NM] [5NM] [10NM].
[OFF] : Target Track is not cleared.

[All] : Clear all.
[(Color)] : Clear Target Track of selected color.
[OFF] Target Track is not cleared.

[All] : Clear all.
[Target Track No. xx] : Clear Target Track of selected number.
[Other] : Clear to No11 from No20.

2) Property Mode
Right-click on the chart and it selects [TGT Property] from the shortcut menu in the normal menu.
Then move the cursor on the target and left-click. The following screen is displayed.
① TT
ID of Target Track is displayed
ECDIS
It is possible to change into the specified
color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
Target Track Number isn't displayed.
② AIS
ID of AIS is displayed
It is possible to change into the specified

color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
AIS Target Number isn't displayed.

3) Target Track Setting [Color] tab
[Target Track Color & Display] panel from left-click [Target Track Color & Display].
The color of TT can be changed and be displayed.
[Individual]: All Target Tracks are valid

[(Color)]: All Target Tracks are valid with selected
color.
[Olive][Blue][Cyan][Green][Yellow][Orange]
[Brown][Red][Pink][Magenta][White]
[OFF]:
When selecting [OFF], Target Track of selected
number isn't displayed.
[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No10]:
Each number is changed to the color which the
color of selected Target Track select.
[Other]:
[Other] is changed to the color which the color of
Target Track No11 - No20 selects.
4) Target Track Setting [Display] tab

In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
[Target Track Color & Display] panel from [Display] tab is displayed from left-click [Target Track
Color & Display]. The valid or invalid of the display of Target Track can be selected.
[Individual]: Each of Target Track can be individually selected.

[OFF]: All Target Track are not displayed.
[ON]: All Target Track are displayed.
[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No.10]:

Each display or hide can be selected.
[Other]: Display or hide of Targets Track No.11 - No.22 can be
selected.

3.3.9.4 File operation
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [Target Track] - [File operation] in that order.
[File Operations] panel is displayed.
Save, Erase, Load and so on of Target Track. can be operated.
Saved file name and date are displayed.
ECDIS
[Save Target Track File] panel is displayed.
It is possible to input of file name and save at this
panel.
The file name is to the alphanumeric 10 character.
When there is same file name, message to confirm
overwrite is displayed.
File of list can be loaded when clicking [Load]

button.
When the Target Track has loaded, "Current Target
Track is deleted, is that OK?" message is
displayed.
Selected file is displayed in [Target Track Display]

box when clicking [Select] button.
File in list can be deleted when clicking [Erase]

button.
“The file can not be recovered when erasing, is that
OK?” message is displayed and can selected [Yes]
or [No].
Target Track which is selected by [Target Track Display]

box can be displayed when putting a check.
* [Erase] button, [Load] button, [Select] button doesn't work when not choosing a file.
* The file can save in 9999. When saving any more, the error message is displayed and can not save.
* During select In [Target Track Display] box, that file isn't changed.

3.3.9.5 Display Received Message
It displays the message which was sent from AIS.
Addressed Message (Displays the sent message from AIS to the own ship)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(1)Addressed Messages] in that order.
Broadcast Message (Displays the message which was sent without specifying an address from AIS)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(2)Broadcast Messages] in that order.
3.3.9.6 AIS sentence

The sentence form that receives AIS is selected. Please confirm the specification of the AIS
device of the ship, and select an appropriate sentence.
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(0) AIS Message] and the following sentences in that order.
(1)VDM
(2)TTD1
(3)TTD2
3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets

The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for
activating and deactivating AIS targets.
Activating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the context menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The
AIS target will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be
displayed.
When the cursor move the target, MMSI (the ship’s name) and CPA/TCPA are displayed.
Deactivating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS
target will become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.

Inactive Active ECDIS
Deactivating all:
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.

3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target
Left-click on the AIS/TT target displayed on the screen so that AIS/TT information will be on the
“Select List” panel on the display panel.
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [TGT Data] from the context menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the AIS/TT target, and then left-click.
The “Selected List” panel will open and AIS/TT target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the “Selected List” panel open in advance,
- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the “Selected Target” panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] provided in each panel. As other way, select
[Cancel TGT Data] on the context menu and left-click the target. If there is a target below the deleted
target, it moves up by one.
[Additional] tab Name:

Name of the AIS target (not
Target ID: displayed for TT targets)
ID of the TT/AIS target
Position:
AIS Detail: Current position of the AIS/TT target
Displaying AIS Information
panel (See 3.3.9.2) Status:
Current status of the AIS/TT target
[Common] tab
Bearing:
Range: Bearing towards the AIS/TT target
Range to the TT/AIS target CPA:
COG: Closest point of approach to the AIS
Course to the TT/AIS target target
SOG: TCPA:
Speed of the TT/AIS target Time to closest point of approach
to the AIS target
[Release] button:
Release the selected target.

3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard)
This function is a monitoring function so as not to lose sight of the man overboard point when person
falls from ship.
1) Start MOB mode

In the Display panel ※
Left-click [MOB] .
ECDIS
In the operation panel

Push [MOB] key.
Then, the point where the mode started is marked as MOB point, and the MOB information
panel is displayed.※
MOB information panel※

MOB Point symbol Bearing and range from own ship
POSN (Position):
Coordinates of MOB point
BRG (Bearing):
Bearing from own ship to
MOB
RNG (Range):
Range from own ship to
MOB
NM/km/sm:
Own ship symbol Each time this button is
pushed, the unit of range
changes
NM: nautical mile

Km: kilometer
sm: statute mile
TTG (Time to go):※

Time until arriving at MOB
2) End MOB mode

In the Display panel※
It keeps pressing the [MOB] for three seconds or more.
In the operation panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] key for three seconds or more.
Then, the MOB panel close, and the MOB point symbol display on the chart disappears.

Note：
※The following information can change by the administrator setting.
・Display/Non-display of [MOB] button on the Display Panel
・Display/Non-display of MOB information panel.
・Switch of MOB Time(TTG or Time)
[MOB] button is non-displays it.
State of Time display (Display after MOB mode starts at elapsed time)

3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk
Drive and DVD
Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the floppy disk drive and the DVD
drive .
ECDIS
Eject button:
Eject button:
Use to open and close the tray.
Use to eject a floppy disk.
Floppy disk drive
Access lamp:
Will light green when the writing to
or reading from a floppy disk
DVD drive
Access lamp:
Will light green when information is
being read from the CD/DVD.
Note:
• Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.

3.4 Shifting the Chart
The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
●[HOME] button
●Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
●Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
●[Port List] button
●Using the position entry panel
3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button

At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to
advance. This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.
Key operation:
Press the [HOME] key.
Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.
Your ship will return to a

position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.
Own ship symbol
[Screen Display of Home Position]

3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor
You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then,
the position becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.7 “Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode”.
True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of
the chart.
ECDIS
2) Left-click at that position.
Cross cursor intersecting point
[Moving to the Center of the Screen]
Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.
[Moving the location of ship display]

3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor
You can grip the chart and move it freely.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor
changes to the hand cursor
Hand cursor
Note:
• If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.
3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]

If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the
registered scale.
• To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] .
Note:
• Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.8.1 “Adding to My
Port List”.
(1) Button operation to jump to the port

Left-click the [Port List] .
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.
Registered position as a port

(2) Menu operation to jump to the port
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
The “My Port List” panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
ECDIS
- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] .
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] .
3.4.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the

Position
You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
• To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] .
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The “Enter Position” panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the
[OK] .
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the
designated position.

3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
●Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
●Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/ context menu)
●Range selection (Range drop-down list)
●Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)
3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the
operation panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
• Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the context menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area “A” you want to enlarge, and
left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area “B” you want to enlarge,
and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
• After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.
Selected area
[Zooming area using the rubber band]
Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale
is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. When there is
not a chart which can be displayed, a background chart is displayed.

3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Scale]/[Range]
drop-down list button.
(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or
ECDIS
the scale set by the system.
- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.5.3 “Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only).” For scales, see
3.5.4 “Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).”
(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel

Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] .
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount
set by the system.
Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs
if the displayed chart is more than double in size than the
original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the
right will be displayed on the “chart” and will appear to notify
lower chart accuracy and clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made
larger (double or more) through proper operation. Warning lines for overscaling

3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.
(1) Switching the range using the display panel

Left-click the range switching drop-down list .
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list
changes green.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.
Range drop-down list

Zoomed out
This indicator lights up

when Range is valid.
Zoomed in

3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.
(1) Switching the scale using the display panel

Left-click the scale switching drop-down list.

2) Left-click the scale in the list. ECDIS
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
Scale drop-down list

Zoomed out
This i
• Table editing
• Graphical editing
• Create alternate
route
ndicator lights up
when Scale is valid.
Zoomed in

3.6 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three
object categories, base display, standard display, and all information(other). You can change the object
category using the display panel.
Base Display: Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ship’s
safety contour.
Standard Display: Objects less important than base display, such as drying line, indication of fixed and
floating aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other Display: Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and
details of all isolated dangers.
Note:
• The initial chart screen status is “Standard Display”. For safety for sailing, use the standard display
or Other display, and not the base display.
You can change the object category by left-clicking the [Base], [Standard], or [Other] on the display
panel.
1) Left-click Object Category drop-down list.
Category drop-down list
• You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [Standard] and [Other]
display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should be
displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been
set for display. will display all objects that belong to standard display.
For selection of object display, see 3.28.1 “Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.”
About the display in the chart area: You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers are
used to make up the chart display. For example, standard display
consists of the base display and information (objects) for Layer
EVENT mark, etc..
standard display. This means that the base display is the basic
Objects of "Other"
one layer and the information for standard display is another Layer
layer, and the standard display is made up by overlapping both Objects of "Standard"
layers. Layer
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event Objects of "Base"
Layer
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc.

[Base display example]
ECDIS
[Standard display example]
[Other display example]
Note:
• The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.

3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode
You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart
using the display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable mode differs depending on the
chart type, either S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3/ARCS.
S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:

[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth
North Up Course Up WPT Up Rotation
Motion
True Yes No No Yes
Relative Yes Yes Yes Yes
For [Rotation] mode Free Yes No No Yes
Motion drop-down Azimuth drop-down

list button list button
ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button
(1) Explanation of each mode:

For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot
use the combination of [True] or [Free] mode and [Course Up] and [WPT Up] mode. Also, on the ARCS
chart, you cannot select Azimuth mode.
1) Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):

True： Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display.
When own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that
own ship always remains on the screen.
Relative： Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move
relatively.
Free： You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ship’s direction of travel.
Also, as the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.

[True Mode] [Relative Mode] [Free Mode]
Fixed Heading line Fixed Own ship
Heading line Heading line
Own ship Own ship

Own ship
Fixed
ECDIS
Note:
• While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.
2) Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Only):

North Up： The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not
flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily
be read out.
Course Up： The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
WPT Up： The chart automatically rotates so that “To WPT” up on the display.
Rotation： You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.
[North Up Mode] [Course Up Mode]

Heading line Heading line
Own ship
Own ship
[Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees [WPT Up Mode]

Heading line To WPT Heading line
Own ship
Own ship

3) Mode change caused by the operation:
In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically changed from the current mode to
another one.
• From [True] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means
of the [Port List] on the display panel.
• From [Relative] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [Port List] on the display panel.
• From [Free] mode to [True] mode:
- When the [Home] is left-clicked.
The [Rotation] made in [Free] mode is retained if the mode is changed over to [True].
Note:
• [Course Up/WPT Up/Rotation] is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.

3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode
You can select Motion mode using the display panel.
Note:
• While [Chart Portfolio] is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.
(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel

1) On the display panel ECDIS
Left-click the Motion drop-down list.
Motion drop-down
list button
2) Select one of items (True, Relative, Free) by left-clicking it.
3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode

You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel.
(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel

1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list on the display panel.
Azimuth drop-down
list button
For [Rotation] mode
2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, WPT Up) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
• If you select [Rotation], enter its rotational angle in degrees. (000.0 – 359.9 degrees).
• If [True] or [Free] is selected in Motion mode, “Course Up” and “WPT Up” cannot be selected.

3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode
Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other
charts will be loaded.
Note:
• For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.
(1) Setting Fix mode using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.
Example use of Chart Fix mode:
• If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart
(JP24NC9G) will be loaded to replace the chart automatically.
1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP24NC9G
• If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and
no other chart will be loaded to replace it.
1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP44OJBE

3.8 My Port List
3.8.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access
to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:
• Select a chart and scale. Register the position to the My ECDIS

• Shift the position you want approximately Port List using the menu.
at the center of the chart.
1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.

S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.4 “Shifting the Chart”) and
zoom in/out the chart (see 3.5 “Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)”) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
• Select right-click-[Select Chart under Cursor] or [Select Chart] on Display panel in that order.
For details, see 3.10.3 “Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)” or 3.10.4 “Selecting
Chart from All (ARCS Only)”.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu,
In the Table User Chart Editing menu
The “Add to my Port List” panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
• Up to 15 characters can be input.

To display the chart registered as My Port List:
Left-click the [Port List] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.4.4 “Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]
3.8.2 Deleting My Port List

You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:

The “My Port List” panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] to close the panel.

3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57
Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be
monitored at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] .
The “Select Chart” panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
By pressing the [HOME] on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.

3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options
(ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
●High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
●Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] on the display panel, [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] in the context menu)
●Various options accessible from the menu
3.10.1 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS

Only)
In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the
[RANGE+/-] key on the operation panel.

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.

Left-click the [Large Chart] or [Small Chart]
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.
Note:
• An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of
error messages, see 9.2.1 “Alarm Information of ARCS Chart”.

3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor
(ARCS Only)
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the context menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart]
panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
ECDIS
• If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
Note:
• When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area
where a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be
displayed in gray.

3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)
You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.
1) Left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the display panel.

The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
• If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
You can open the “Select Chart” panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] on the
display panel.

3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)
A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the context menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.
ECDIS
Blue square
[Selected chart]

3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart
(ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the context menu.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.
3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart

(ARCS Only)
1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the “High Resolution Area” from the context menu
by left-clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area
surrounded by the orange frame shows are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.
Orange frame
[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]

3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the context menu.
The “Note and Diagram” panel opens.
ECDIS
2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are
displayed. The panel can be closed with the [Close] , and the chart will return to the original
display position.
Note:
• The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.

3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary
Notice (ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The “Temporary and Preliminary” panel opens.
• Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.
2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK].
Then, the “Information” panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is
displayed as shown in the picture.
• “Temporary and Preliminary Notices” can be displayed only when the chart has been
updated.
Note:
• The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.

3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)
(1) Entering offset
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.
Note:
• Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the ECDIS
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The “Chart Shift” panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK]
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear]
• If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that
value will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
• When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] will return the
display to that value.

Using the Cursor:
1) In the “Chart Shift” panel, left-click the [by Cursor].
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange
line to determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the “Chart Shift” panel. (You can edit the
value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Orange Line
Cursor
The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be
displayed in blue, and “Chart Shift” will be displayed in Panel of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.
Shift amount

(2) Transforming the datum
You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ship’s position to the WGS-84 system.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order. ECDIS
The “Datum Transfomation” panel opens.
2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:

• Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
• Left-click the [Ship Position] to enter the own ship’s position.
• Left-click the [by Cursor] and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the position
is entered.
3) Left-click the “Geodetic Datum From” drop-down list, then select the geodetic system of the
conversion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be
displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box,
left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be
displayed in blue. “Chart” will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.

Note:
Chart position for the WGS-84 system
Chart position for the local

geodetic system
∆X, ∆Y: Offset value for WGS-84
• When ∆X and ∆Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically,
and the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the
primary geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and “Chart Shift To WGS-84” is
displayed in the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values
are set in the “Datum Transformation” panel and the [OK] is left-clicked, and the message “The
Datum is already WGS-84” will be displayed on the panel.

3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide Range View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two
sections in which the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in
various ways. Also, with the wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the
display panel area. ECDIS
Active screen
Own ship's symbol
View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen View 1 screen
View 2
View 2 screen
Inactive screen Wide view screen
[Multi View and Wide View]

3.11.1 Multi View Screen
You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The selected screen has active title
bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To change a screen actively, it left-clicks the screen to want to choose. At this time, off-center will be
used to place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the
cursor to the title bar of the view, then left-click.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
･ When displaying Multi Window, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
- Top Bottom
･ Chart is displayed dividing top and bottom.
･ View1 is displayed in upper end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in lower end title
bar.
- Right Left
･ Chart is displayed dividing right and left.
･ View1 is displayed in right end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in left end title
bar.
- Right Top View
･ View2 is displayed in the upper right of View1.
･ View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Left Top View
･ View2 is displayed in the upper left of View1.
･ View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Right Bottom View
･ View2 is displayed in the lower right of View1.
･ View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Left Bottom View
･ View2 is displayed in the lower left of View1.
･ View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Select Area
･ A selected area will be displayed as view 2.
(Refer to 3.11.2 Selecting an Area for more information)
- Wide Range View
･ [Wide Range View] is displayed in the display panel.
(Refer to 3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen for more information)

(Single view) (Top Bottom view) (Right Left view) (Right Top view)
View 2
View 1
View 1 View 2 View 1

View 2
(Left Top view) (Right Bottom view) (Left Bottom view)

ECDIS
View 2 View 1
View 1
View 1
View 2 View 2
• Scale, Range, Motion mode, Azimuth mode can be set to each of View1 and View2.
• The following is displayed only in View1. It isn't displayed in View2.
･ Own ship’s track, Plan route
･ Event mark, Information mark, Tide mark, Highlighting, Reference Point, Clearing Line, Cross
Bearing, LOP, AIS, TT, Radar overlay, User map
• It is canceled when changing View1/View2 during the following operation.
･ During EBL maneuver creating
･ During Make AZ
• Multi-view display is canceled when doing the following operation.
･ Starts the Route Planning
･ Starts the User Map Editor
･ Select Single View
• Manual Update is reflected in View1 and View2 both.
• As for the display panel one of the following, the value of active View in View1/View2 is displayed.
･ Range
･ Scale
･ Motion mode
･ Azimuth mode
Note:
• In View 2, the radar overlay, route, AIS/TT target ship symbols, own ship’s track, user chart objects
and manual updates are not displayed.
3.11.2 Selecting an Area

A selected area will be displayed as view 2.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed
in the upper right of View1. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is
displayed in view2.

3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen
section move to the upper part of the screen.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide range view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide range view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue
line and the view 2 chart areas will be surrounded with a red line.
Wide view
Area currently displayed (Blue line)

To close the wide view screen:
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original
place.

3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT
When you start sailing, select the Ｒoute and To WPT as follows: Note that the route file extension
shows the route type. More specifically, the extension “.rtn” is used for Normal type and “.rta” is used for
TOS type.
3.12.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WPT Using the

Display Panel ECDIS
(1) Selecting the route using the display panel

1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the Route list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on
the chart.
• The initial route status is “UNLOAD”.
Deleting the route:

To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the
Route list, and then left-click “UNLOAD”.
• The selected route is deleted from the screen.
Note:
• If the scheduled route is on floppy /CD/DVD disk, you can copy it to hard disk using the File
Manager. See 7.1 “File Manager”.
(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel

As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.
Automatic selection (Auto Select):

The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this
waypoint, the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.

2) Left-click the “Auto Select”.

Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.

2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the
selected route, left-click “1” in the “To WPT” drop-down
list.

3.12.2 Distance Measurement
You can calculate the distance between WPTs or between own ship and a WPT with the calculator
(“Distance Measurement” panel).

Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the “Calculating Distance” panel opens.
“Calculating Distance” panel isn't displayed when not loading a route. Load a route.
ECDIS
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] area, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or
[Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WPT number you want
from the [WPT No.] drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by
left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] area, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If
you have selected [Way Point], select the WPT number you want from the [WPT No.]
drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an
arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the
calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the [Close] button.
[Select Way point/Picked Point/Own Ship.]
[Select WPT No.] [Resultant]

Example use of [Calculate Distance] panel:
• When selecting [Way Point]
Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WPT No.
The calculation result is displayed.
The route between the selected WPTs is shown in green.

• When selecting [Picked Point]
Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary Own ship position

point on the route.
ECDIS
The route from the arbitrary point to WPT No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.
• When selecting [Own Ship]
Select [Own Ship]. Own ship position
Select WPT to go
through.
The route from the own ship position to WPT No. 03 via selected WPT is shown in green.

3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm
XTD (Cross Track Distance) Alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
With the following menu, the effectively of the XTD alarm can be changed.
1) In normal menu
Select [(2) Route] - [(4) Use XTD Alarm] in that order.
The check in the menu switches over. When a check is displayed, the XTD alarm becomes ON.
The XTD alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
The XTD alarm doesn’t occur when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is OFF.

3.13 Displaying a User Map
You can display a user chart you have made.
Note:
• Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 “Chart
Editing”.
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) select User Map] in that order.
The “Open Chart File” panel opens.
2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The “Open Chart File” panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.
To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(2) Unselect User Map] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.

3.14 Reading Out Information on the
Object
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout.
If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart
(S-57/C-MAP/ARCS).
(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the “Information” panel opens according to the selected object.
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]
[S-57/C-MAP Chat Information]
[ARCS Chat Information]

(2) Displaying additional chart information:
When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in the
combo box under the “Information” panel.
1) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show].

2) The additional information will be displayed.
• To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].
ECDIS

(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing
line
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens according to the selected object.
• The “Location/Attributes” panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
• To delete the object, left-click the [Delete].
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close].
[Example for the Event mark:]

3.15 Operating EBL/VRM
There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the
chart.
●Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
●Using the context menu ([Dropped EBL/VRM][CCRP EBL/VRM],1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
●Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] buttons on the display panel
3.15.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel

ECDIS
On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You
can also set your ship’s position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.
(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker

If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed
line. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Direction and distance from

Push EBL1 to
Center point to crossing point Push VRM1 to
display EBL1 line
display VRM1 line
EBL1
VRM1
EBL
VRM
Turn EBL dial to
Turn VRM dial to
control EBL1
control VRM1
Crossing point Own ship
[EBL1/VRM1 line display on the chart]
Azimuth of EBL1 Distance of VRM1

on EBL1 and VRM1
[Display panel (EBL1/VRM1 displayed)]
To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:

Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.

(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker
If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash
dotted line to distinguish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers is controlled by turning
the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:

Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.
(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations

The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2
markers are simultaneously displayed. For example, let’s assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are
displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be operated by the EBL dial. In this case, press the
[EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by the EBL dial. (See the next page)
These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and VRM2 or EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be displayed by combinations of the previously
displayed EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2. When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only
their bearing and distance will be displayed.
EBL VRM
Turn EBL dial to
Turn VRM dial to
control EBL1
control VRM2
[Display panel and chart (Operating EBL1 and VRM2)]
Note:
• For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
• They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating turning the EBL or VRM dial.

[Switching of EBL1 Marker and EBL2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]
ECDIS
No displaying EBL
EBL1
EBL2
EBL2
EBL1
EBL EBL
Displaying EBL1 Displaying EBL2
EBL2 EBL2 EBL1 EBL1
EBL EBL
EBL2
EBL1
Displaying EBL1 and EBL2 Displaying EBL1 and EBL2

(EBL dial operate to EBL2) (EBL dial operate to EBL1)
(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point
The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ship’s position
to another position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 push EBL dial Then, the EBL/VRM base point displayed in the own ship
position.
2) Move the cursor with EBL/VRM to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position

The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the
ship’s center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating.
The base point moves on the ship..
ECDIS
[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]

3.15.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu
You can draw CCRP (the base position is ship-centered) EBL/VRM or Dropped (the base position is
floating) EBL/VRM with context menu.
[Context Menu – Dropped EBL/VRM] [Context Menu – CCRP EBL/VRM]
3.15.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option

When both EBL and VRM drawing, you can draw either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and,
after fixing EBL, VRM appears.

Select [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The “Marker Setting” panel opens.

2) Left-click either “1 Step” or “2 Step” and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
• 1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
• 2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)
ECDIS
Tips: Useful context – Abort

During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following
procedure.
Right-click at any position on the

Left-click “Abort” to abort
chart to open the context menu. Rotate the trackball to move
the current operation step.
“Abort” context menu will open. the cursor on the “Abort”.

3.15.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM – EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)
The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.
(1) 1-Step Operation

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed with EBl1, and the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is
displayed on the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.
Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM] Left-Click
- [EBL1/VRM1]
Left-Click

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
4) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.
ECDIS
Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM] Left-Click
- [EBL1/VRM1]
Left-Click
Left-Click
3.15.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM – EBL1 (EBL2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
3.15.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM – VRM1 (VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.

3.15.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM – Move Origin1 (Move Origin2)
The following description is an operation to move Origin1 (the base point of EBL1/VRM1).
Moving Origin2 (the base point of EBL2/VRM2) becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [Move Origin1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
3.15.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM – EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and there base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.
Select
[CCRP EBL/VRM] -
Left-Click
[EBL1/VRM1]

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
Select ECDIS
[CCRP EBL/VRM] -
[EBL1/VRM1]
Left-Click
Left-Click
3.15.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM – EBL1 (EBL2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
3.15.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM – VRM1 (VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.

3.15.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel
On the display panel, you can operate and display value of EBL and VRM from “Tools” panel.
Azimuth of EBL button Units of distance button

T: True North mode When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
R: Bearing Reference mode [NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] -> …
switching"Tools""Brilliance"

on EBL1 and VRM1

on EBL2 and VRM2
Base point button

[Blank]: CCRP
D: Dropped point
Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 button

Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 button

Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
EBL1/EBL2 edit button

Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
VRM1/VRM2 edit button

Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.

3.15.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel
The following description is an operation of EBL1. EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Drawing EBL1 and setting the bearing

1) When “EBL1 edit button” is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, “EBL1 edit button” is changed active and EBL1 is displayed.
ECDIS
(2) Deletion EBL1

1) When “EBL1 edit button” is active, left-click to this button.
Then, “EBL1 edit button” is changed inactive and EBL1 disappears.
Lift-click to the “EBL1 edit button”
3.15.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel

The following description is an operation of VRM1. VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Drawing VRM1 and setting the distance

1) When “VRM1 edit button” is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, “VRM1 edit button” is changed active and VRM1 is displayed.
(2) Deletion VRM1

1) When “VRM1 edit button” is active, left-click to this button.
Then, “VRM1 edit button” is changed inactive and VRM1 disappears
Lift-click to the “VRM1 edit button”

3.15.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM
The following description is an operation to change the base of EBL1/VRM1.
EBL2/VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Changing Dropped (the base position is floating).

1) When “Base point button” is displayed blank, left-click to this button.
Then, “Base point button” is changed to display “D” and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the cursor.
(2) Changing CCRP (the base position is ship-centered).

1) When “Base point button” is displayed “D”, left-click to this button.
Then, “Base point button” is changed to display blank and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the ship.
Lift-click to the “Base point button”

3.15.4 Marker Setting
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
ECDIS
The “Marker Setting” panel opens.
1) Display Unit Simultaneity:

[VRM1 distance unit], [VRM2 distance unit] button of cursor synchronize when making [Display Unit
Simultaneity] valid.
Distance unit synchronize .
2)EBL/VRM Step :
See 3.15.1.1 “Selecting 1-step/2-step”
3) Cursor Read Out:

• Latitude/Longitude: When [Latitude/Longitude] is selected, latitude and longitude is displayed in the
cursor information pop up.
• Bearing/Range: When [Bearing/Range] is selected, bearing and range is displayed in the cursor
information pop up.

3.16 Running Fix
the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM.
This connection is kept regardless of the ship’s movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own
ship against the fixed position at all times.
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the context menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.
Fixed position
Your ship
Bearing
Position
Distance
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
• The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves,
the bearing and distance displayed change accordingly.
[Relation between your ship’s position and fixed position when the ship moves]
Fixed position
Your ship
The bearing and distance are displayed here.
To delete the running fix:

Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the context menu.

3.17 Monitoring Dragging Anchor
A A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship
moves and part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a “Dragging anchor” alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at
which you left-click on the chart as the center.
Occurrence of “Dragging anchor” alarm

ECDIS
The dragging anchor monitoring circle

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The “Monitoring Dragging Anchor” panel opens.
By default, the heading forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking
on the chart can also set the position as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
• To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.
How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.

Dragging anchor alarm:
When the “Alarm list” panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Dragging anchor] Icon
blinks in red.
“Red” Icon: Dragging Anchor

3.18 User-Marking/Highlighting
can input the following marks on the chart.
●Event Mark : During voyage, you can put an Event Mark at the ship position.
●Information Mark: You can put an Information Mark at any position.
●Tidal Stream Mark: You can put an Tidal Mark at any position. The speed (knot) and time can be input.
●Highlight: You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.
ECDIS
Highlighing
Own ship
Tidal Stream Mark
Event Mark
Information Mark
3.18.1 Marking the Event Mark

(1) Event Marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an Event Mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
Left-click the [Event ].“Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel opens.
- To check the Information on the Event Mark ,see 3.14 “Reading Out Information on the
Objects”.
(2) Event Marking using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel opens.

2) In the “Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
• Enter comment on the event.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Event Mark.
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Event Mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the Event Mark
Event Mark
[Apply] : It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.
(3) How to delete the Event Mark

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
The “Delete Event Mark” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [No.] you want and then left-click the [Delete].
The panel closes and the selected Event Mark is deleted from the chart
3) Left-click [Close] , ”Delete Event Mark” panel is close.

3.18.2 Marking the Information Mark
You can put an Information Mark ( ) at any point on the chart.

ECDIS
The “Location/Attributes - Information” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Information” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter the comment on the Information Mark.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Information
Mark.
• To edit the Information Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] .
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Information Mark ( ) is put on the screen.
Position of the Information
Information Mark
[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.
• For viewing the Information on the Information Mark or editing/deleting the Information Mark,
see 3.14“Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

3.18.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark
You can put a Tidal Stream Mark at any point on the chart. The Tidal Stream Mark has the bearing and
Stream speed in knot. You can edit them after putting the Tidal Stream Mark on the chart.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Set/Drift/Time setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
- Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time
• Enter comment on the Tidal Stream Mark.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Tidal Stream
Mark.
• To edit the Tidal Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Tidal Stream Mark is put on the screen.
Position of the Tidal Stream Mark
Time
Knot
Tidal Stream Mark
• For viewing the Information on the Tidal Stream Mark or editing/deleting the Tidal Stream
Mark, see 3.14 “Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

3.18.4 Highlight
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to
make notations.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
ECDIS
The “Location/Attributes - Highlight” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted. Then, click on the
coordinates of a point which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Highlight” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter comment on the Highlight.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Highlight.
• To edit the Highlight position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens. Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Highlight is put on the screen.
• Diagram is canceled when doing the left double-click when creating two points.
• Diagram is canceled when clicking the [OK] when creating two points.
• Diagram is canceled when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when
creating two points.
• Diagram is fixed when doing the left double-click when creating more than three points and
the “Location/Attributes - Highlight” panel closes.
• Diagram is fixed when clicking the [OK] when creating more than three points and the panel
closes.
• Diagram is fixed when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when creating
more than three points and the panel closes. Equal to or less than two point are canceled.
• When doing the following operation without ever clicking [Apply], diagram is canceled and
transitions to each mode.
･ Chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu of right-click.
･Chooses [Other Information] from the context menu of right-click.
・Chooses [Auto Mode] from the context menu of right-click.
･ Chooses [Zoom Area] from the context menu of right-click.
･ Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
･ Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1(or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
･ Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1 (or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
･ Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
･ Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1 (or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
･ Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [VRM1(or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
• Diagram is fixed when clicking [Apply] once and doing the following operation and transitions
to each mode.

Top of a highlighted area
Highlight
• For viewing the information on the Highlight or editing/deleting the Highlight, see 3.14
“Reading Out Information on the Objects”.
Note:
• When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 “Chart
Editing”).

3.19 EBL Maneuver
Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain
conditions. By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be
used as a target when turning.
Supplemental line
Heading line
Planned route
ECDIS
R
REACH Maneuver curve
WOL (Wheel Over Line)
WOL line
Own ship's position
WOL: Wheel Over Line

Reach: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R: Turning radius

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver ] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The “EBL Maneuver Setting” panel opens and cross cursor changes to the arrow(EBL) cursor.

2) Set or select each item.
Reach： Enter the Reach (m).
Setting range is 0-2000.
Turn Mode： Left-click either “Radius” or “Rate”.
• Radius: Enter the constant turn radius (NM)
• Rate: Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)
3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (Wheel Over Line) will change depending upon the Wheel Over Line of
the supplemental line.
4) Set the bearing of the supplemental line with [EBL] dial on the operation panel.
Moving the [EBL] dial to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The
position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.
5) Left-click on the chart.

The setting will be established.
Note:
• Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as
that of your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.
To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) Remove EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The “EBL Maneuver Setting” panel closed.

3.20 Cross Bearing
This function displays cross bearings. An angle for calculating the own ship’s position from the
reference point can be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has
encountered an error causing the own ship’s position to be obscure, the own ship’s position can be
obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed target’s bearing on the chart using the cross bearing
function.
ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The “Cross Bearing”dialog box opens and the mouse cursor changes.
Reference coordinates of the cross bearing

line
Reciprocal bearing from the reference point
Bearing from the reference point
Length of the cross bearing line
Selection of bearing display on the chart

(Ture/Reverse)
2) Sets the reference point

By the trackball operation
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line,
and left-click. Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and
Longitude fields in the [Cross Bearing] dialog box.
By the [Cross Bearing] panel operation
It inputs value to the [LAT] and [LON] numerical box.

3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the [EBL] dial or entering the reciprocal
bearing viewed from the reference point.
Bearing from the reference point is displayed in the 180 degree reciprocal bearing with typing in
value.
4) Determine the distance of the cross bearing line by turning the [VRM] dial or entering the
distance.
Setting range is 0.0NM - 99.9NM.
5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set], and the bearing is
displayed beside the cross bearing line.
6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [True] radio button or the [Reverse]
radio button.
[True] display
[Reverse] display
7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be
displayed at the same time.
8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].
9) To close the“Cross Bearing” panel, left-click the [Close].

3.21 Inputting Clearing Lines
Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.
1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see 3.15 “Operating EBL/VRM”), the start point and end point of
clearing lines should be determined from the base point and cross point of EBL/VRM, and then
the right button on the track ball should be clicked.
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] -[(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order..
menu to display “Not Less Than” and “Not More Than”, and left-click on either of them.
3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.
NLT: Not Less Than

“NLT116” means “Not less than 116 (degree)°”.
NMT: Not More Than
“NMT152” means “Not more than 152(degree)°”.
• For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.14
“Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

3.22 LOP(Line Of Position)
This function displays LOP. This function can correct the position of the ship by using the distance or
the angle from the reference point.
1) Display "Create LOP" panel

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
"Create LOP" panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the（） cursor.
Latitude, Longitude:
The starting position of LOP is specified. Default is
own ship position of point that displays the dialog.
The specification of the value is a left-click on the chart
screen. Or, value is input left-clicking a column of
Latitude/Longitude.
Type:
Type of LOP is selected and the value is input.
Bearing …Azimuth and distance are specified turns
the [EBL] dial and changes the value.
Range … Distance is specified turns the VRM dial
and changes the value..
value is input left-clicking a column of Bearing/Range.
Time:
Time is specified. Default is time. Value is input
left-clicking a column of Time.
Set LOP:
LOP is fixed by set value. This button is invalid when LOP is over 3 lines.
Select Cross Point:

When two LOP (or TLP) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. “Select
Cross Point” panel is displayed when you left-click this button.
Create TPL (Transferred Line Of Position):

LOP being displayed now is made, and it moves parallel and TPL is made the ship
movement. see 3-120～122 “Example of ship position correction that uses TPL”.
Close:
Close"Create LOP" panel.Made LOP doesn't disappear.

2) Delete LOP
Select [(7)Main]-[(4)LOP]-[(2)Delete All LOP]. Then All LOP line is deleted.
3) Select Cross Point

When two LOP (or TPL) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. “Select Cross Point”
panel is displayed when you left-click this button. When LOP ( or TPL) is set 3 lines and more,
information message is displayed and cross point is displayed by select 2 lines.
Latitude, Longuitude:
ECDIS
Display the position cross point.
When there are two points or more, left-click
the position list and select crossed LOP point.
Reference Point
Adjust own ship’s position to selected cross
point.
Close
Close “Select Cross Point” panel.

1. Select Cross Point by 2lines LOP
Displayed ”Select Cross Point” panel and marked
Cross Point chosen LOP becomes a red line
Adjusted own ship's position

2. Select Cross Point by 3lines LOP
Displayed information message
Click [OK] button
ECDIS
Displayed ”Select Cross Point” panel

and no marked Cross Point Marked Cross Point chosen LOP red line.
Select 2 lines
Adjusted own ship's position

4) Create TPL (Transferred Position Line)
After the own ship adjusts by Cross Point, TPL can be displayed according to the progress of
the ship.
Example of ship position correction that uses TPL:
1. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured, and LOP is set.
Moreover, the distance to the ship and the target is measured, and LOP is set.
Two LOP is set.
2. Select "Select Cross Point" button to display the cross point.
Displaying the cross point.
3. Select "Reference Point" button to adjust the position of the ship. (Temporary Position)
Adjusting the position of the ship.

4. The ship is at some time.
ECDIS
5. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured again, and the third
LOP is set.
Third LOP is set.
6. Select [Create TPL] . Then, TPL is displayed according to the progress of the ship.
Displaying TPL

7. Select "Select Cross Point" . And, set the cross point of TPL and the third LOP.
Information message displayed when there are three LOP or more.

Select [OK] .
Select the third LOP and TPL.
Displaying cross point.
8. [Reference Point] button is selected, and the position of the ship is adjusted.
Adjusting the position of the ship.

Note:
When the own ship is adjusted by LOP, the operation is recorded in Logbook. When
"Event-Reference Point" is selected from the list and [View REF Point] button is pushed, the
[Information] panel is displayed. The [Information] panel displays [Information] of associated LOP.
Select [MENU] – [(7)Main] – [(7)Logbook] in that order.
ECDIS
Select “Event-Reference Point” and left-click [View REF Point]

3.23 Acquisition Zone
Acquisition Zone is used to automatically monitor AIS target in vicinity of own ship.
When AIS target enters Acquisition Zone, status of AIS is automatically changed to Activate state.
1)In the MENU

Select [MENU] – [(7)Main] – [(1)Make AZ] in that order
When [AZ Function] of “Make AZ” panel is valid., “Acquisition Zone 1(or 2)” is displayed on the chart
screen. When [AZ Function] of ”Make AZ” panel is invalid, “Acquisition Zone 1(or 2)” is disappeared.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the Acquisition Zone line.
Acquisition Zone 1
Setting of Acquisition Zone 1 is changed
AZ Function
Display of “Acquisition Zone 1” is switched
ON … “Acquisition Zone 1” is displayed
OFF…“Acquisition Zone 1” is disappeared
Make AZ 1
Setting o”f Acquisition Zone 1 “is changed
“AZ Function” is valid after fixing the input.
[Start Side], [End Side], [Far Edge, Width]
Display setting of Acquisition

(Refer to figure below)
Setting is changed by [Make AZ] 1 is
clicked
Acquisition Zone 2 setting area

Setting of Acquisition Zone 2 is changed
Item is the same as Acquisition Zone 1.
Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area
Acquisition Zone 2 Setting area Close Make AZ panel is closed
Start Side
End Side
Far Edge
Width

2) Change setting method of Acquisition Zone
The procedure for changing the setting is shown about the range of the area of “Acquisition
Zone”.
Change setting method of “Acquisition Zone 1” Setting area *the procedure is same as for “Acquisition
Zone 2” Setting area.
1. Select [Make AZ 1] button. Then [Make AZ 1] button is changed color.
ECDIS
2. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "Start Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Far Edge" is changed.
Start Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the
operation panel.
Setting range is 000.0° -
359.9°.
Far Edge
Change by [VRM] Dial of the
operation panel.
Width is not change.
Setting range is 0.50NM –
31.50NM.
3. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.
4. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "End Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Width" is changed.
End Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the operation
panel.
Setting range is 000.0°- 359.9°.
Width
Change by [VRM] Dial of the operation
panel.
Value of Far Edge changes according
to changing Width.
Setting range is 0.50NM - 31.50NM.
5. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.

The display of "Make AZ 1" returns to the origin, and "AZ Function of Acquisition Zone 1" is valid.

3.24 Multi Window
3.24.1 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the “analog meter panel”on the display panel. You can see the HDG,
COG, set/Drift, CTS on the “analog meter panel”. Also, you can select the “Display Panel Setting”
panel to be displayed on the “analog meter panel”.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] - [(2) Analog Meter panel] in that order.
The following “analog meter panel” is displayed.
On the “analog meter panel”, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COG) are represented by the
indicators of the “analog meter panel”. The color of the item and that of the indicator match
each other. So, you can easily identify each indicator from the color.
The white arrow corresponds to the white

triangle.
(Color matches each other in it supports items) Ship’s heading.
Log speed (speed through water)
Course and speed (The vector of the vessel’s motion over

the ground and the course of the route selected)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.
Current direction calculated by the difference between the

COG and HDG vector.
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG

and HDG vector.
Set /Drift(Blue arrow)
HDIG (Gray arrow)
COG (Gray arrow)
CTS (Red arrow)

To the close the analong mater panel:
In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8)Multi Window]-[(2)Analog meter] in that order.
Then, the “Display Panel Setting” panel is closed.
Changing the items to be displayed on the “analog meter panel”:

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(7) Display Panel Setting] in that order.
Then, the “Display Panel Setting” panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and left-click the [OK] button. It reflects
setting and it closes a panel.
It cancels setting and it closes a panel when clicking [Cancel] button.
CTS label, CTS value are displayed in the display panel when making valid.
Depth label, Depth sensor name, Depth value are displayed in the display
panel when making valid.
HDG is displayed at the “Analog meter panel” when making valid.
COG is displayed at the “Ana log meter” panel when making valid.
Set / Drift is displayed at the “Analog meter” panel when making valid.
CTS is displayed at the “Analog meter” panel when making valid.
Triangle is displayed in the left side of each of HDG, COG, Set, CTS of the
display panel.
3.24.2 Other Multi Window display

The window of the following contents can be displayed at the thing except the analog meter.
Because the contents which can be displayed by the establishment environment are different, for the
details, refer to the instruction manual of each of the facilities.
1) To open multi window

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to display more than the
menu, the supporting menu has a check mark and the panel is displayed.

The menu where a window is displayed:
(2)Analog Meter (See 3.24.1)
(3)Climate
(4)Draft
(5)Current Wind
(6)Course Rudder Graph
(7)Course Bar
(8)Ship
(9)Engine Graph
(1)Depth Graph
(2)Current
2) To close multi window

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to close more than the
menu, the supporting menu disappears a check mark and a panel is close.
3) Preset the multi window display condition

The condition of the multi window can be saved and preseted. (either valid or invalid, and the
position to display, and so on )
Save the multi window condition:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] – [(7) PreSet Save] in that order.
It maintains the display condition and the display position of the present multi window. When
doing the same operation once again from the menu, the display condition and the display
position maintain new one.
Preset the multi window condition:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] – [(1) PreSet] in that order.
It presets the display condition and the display position of the multi window to have maintained.
4) Setting to the multi window display

It changes the setting of each multi window. for the details of the setting, refer to the instruction
manual of each of the facilities.
In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] – [(0) Option...] in that order.

3.25 Cursor Auto Mode
The auto mode is the mode that the display of the contents and the change of the setting can be
implemented by repeating a cursor in the specific object and the line.
The cursor becomes a crosshair cursor.
“Navigation & Planning” The initial condition in case of start-up becomes an auto mode about the sailing
executive-state.
ECDIS
When choosing [AUTO mode] from the context menu when a cursor is displayed at the thing except the
crosshair cursor in [Zoom Area] etc, the cursor mode changes to the auto mode.
Also, it returns to the auto mode automatically when not clicking for 1 minute when a cursor is displayed
at the thing except the crosshair cursor and leaving.
The selectable object and the displayed information

When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1 Object Operation which is Information which is displayed
possible when when adjusting a cursor
left-clicking
1 AIS “AIS” Non-active: actived AIS target.
Ship’s name(number) Active:Select List display and
CPA being hidden.
TCPA
2 TT “TT” Select List display and being
Target number hidden.
CPA
TCPA
3 BUOY “BUOY”
Comment
4 LIGHT “LIGHT”
Comment
5 Cross point of EBL1 or “EBL1”(“EBL2”) Changing the EBL1(EBL2) or
VRM1 “VRM1”(“VRM2”) VRM1
(EBL1 or VRM1) (VRM2);1-step operation.
6 EBL1(EBL2) “EBL1”(“EBL2”) Changing the EBL1(EBL2)
7 VRM1(VRM2) “VRM1”(“VRM2”) Changing the VRM1(VRM2)
8 AZ1(AZ2) “AZ1”(“AZ2”) Changing the AZ1(AZ2)
The item to change by the place to
click is different.
・ Start Side
・ End Side
・ Far Side
・ Width

The selectable object and the displayed information --continued--
When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1 Object Operation which is Information which is displayed
possible when when adjusting a cursor
left-clicking
9 User Map Object “MAP”
(Symbol/Line/Area/Text) Comment
Event Mark “EVENT”
Comment
Information Mark “INFO”
Comment
Tidal Stream Mark “TIDE”
Comment
Highlight “HIGHLIGHT”
Comment
10 AIS Ring filter “AIS” Changing to the value AIS Ring
“Ring” filter.
AIS Sector filter “AIS” Changing to the value AIS Sector
“Sector” filter.
*1 Operation is done about the object with the priority which is high when adjusting a cursor when an
object overlaps and is displayed

3.26 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the
items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the “logbook Setting”panel . How to display the
logbook and how to select the items to be saved are explained here.
3.26.1 Displaying the Logbook

The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.26.2 “Logbook ECDIS
Setting ”.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(7) Logbook] in that order.
The “Logbook” panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
・ No.
・ Date
・ Time
・ Event (kind of alarm, Event Mark Navtex, etc. -- depends on the
“Logbook setting” panel settings.),
・ POSN1
・ POSN2
・ Latitude
・ Longitude
・ COG
・ SOG
・ HDG
・ STW
・ Av. Speed 4h
・ Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours)
・ Voyage DIST. (G )
・ Voyage DIST. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water))
・ Charts
・ Set
・ Drift
・ Wind Dir. (direction)
・ Wind Speed
・ Wave Dir. (direction)
・ Wave Height
・ Air Press (pressure)
・ Air Temperature.
・ Water Temperature.
・ Engine Rev. (revolution)
・ Comments

Note:
• The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 7.9 “Clear Voyage Distance”.)
• The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse
format.
• Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.

Button Operation (left-click the button):
[Filter]: The “Logbook Setting” panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For
logbook option settings, see the next 3.26.2 “ Logbook Setting”.
[Column Setting]: You can select any item in the list. Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark (✔) shows that the selected item is set to ON. Selected
column and [Up] or [Down], The column changes the order in table of
“Logbook” panel ECDIS
Column list is as follows:

・ Date
・ Time
・ Event
・ POSN1
・ POSN2
・ Latitude
・ Longitude
・ COG(°)
・ SOG(kn)
・ Heading(°)
・ Log(kn)
・ Av. Speed 4h(kn)
・ Av. Speed 24h(kn)
・ Voyage DIST.(G)(NM)
・ Voyage DIST.(W)(NM)
・ Charts, Set(°), Drift(kn)
・ Wind Dir. (°)
・ Wind Speed(m/sec)
・ Wave Dir. (kn)
・ Wave Height(m)
・ Air Press Temp.(hPa)
・ Temp(℃), Water Temp.(℃)
・ Engine Rev.(rpm)
・ Comments
・ Wave Height(m)
・ Air Press .(hPa)
・ Air Temprature (℃)
・ Water Temprature.(℃)
・ Engine Rev.(rpm)
・ Comment
Following column can not move:
・ Date
・ Time
[OK] : It saves setting contents.
[Cancel] : It cancels setting contents.

[View Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex" , and then left-click to open
the “Letter” panel that shows the detailed information on the Navtex
messages.
You can mark it if you select [Marking on the Chart]. You can set expiration
date then. When [Expire Date] is off, a marking is deleted after the reception
15 days later.
It changes to the data which the information on the "Letter" panel selected
when selecting another Navtex in "Logbook" panel as it opened a panel
and clicking
[Letter].
[Marking on the Chart]: It displays Navtex symbol on the chart when making valid.
[Expire Date]: [Expire Date] entry field and the note become valid when making valid.
Navtex symbol becomes hidden when passing an [Expire Date]
In case of invalid, the symbol becomes hidden when passing on the 15
days from the date of receive.
In the date of reception, the date in front can not be entered.
Also, more than 15 days after date, too, can not be entered from the date
of reception.
[Edit]: Navtex "Location" panel is displayed.
[Print]: When setting a printer, the Navtex information can be printed.
[Close]: “Letter” panel is closes.
[View REF Point]: Left-click the log that is including “Event-Reference Point” , and then
left-click this button to open the “Information” panel that shows the
detailed information on the Reference Point messages.The following
contents are displayed when selecting “Event-Reference Point” and
clicking
[View REF Point].
・LAT
・LON
・Min Scale
・Max Scale
・Plot Type
・Source
・Time
・Comment

The following contents are displayed when there is LOP cross point information.
LOP1(or LOP2)
･ Latitude
･ Longitude
･ BRG(°)
･ RNG(NM)
･ Data
･ TPL(Yes / No)
The panel closes when clicking [Close] . ECDIS
[Delete Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex", and then left-click this
button to open the “Delete” panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes
Navtex.
• Selected Message: When the [OK] is left-clicked, the selected “log No”. in the
“Logbook” panel is deleted.
• Before: Enter the [date/time] you want delete the Navtex messages
before the entered [date/time].
When the [OK] is left-clicked, the Navtex messages before the
set [date/time] are deleted.
• All Message: When the [OK] is left-clicked, All Message in the “Logbook”
panel is deleted.
[Export]: Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a
spreadsheet program and edited with a personal computer. Select one of the
following items in the “Export” panel:
• Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.
• From/To: Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.
The “Save As” panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] in the
“Export” panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] column, select
the folder in which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] .

• For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 10.5 “Data Formats
of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.”
[Cancel]: [Save As] panel closes without changing setting.
[Jump]: Left-click the record data, and then left-click this . Then, the position of recorded
data is displayed at the center of the screen.
[Print]: The “Print” panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the
printing conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
• Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
• From/To: The data in the date range entered in the input box will be
printed. (The item which is printed is decided.)
[Print] panel closes when clicking [Cancel] .

[Input]: You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the
[OK] is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the “Logbook” panel. (The
No. in this panel corresponds to the No. in the “Logbook” panel.)
ECDIS
When clicking [Cancel], input value are canceled and the “Input” panel closes.
[Close]: Closes the panel.

3.26.2 Logbook Setting
You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger
conditions to save the log data which will only be used to display in the “Logbook” panel explained in
3.26.1 “Displaying the Logbook”.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(5) Logbook Setting] in that order.
The “Logbook Setting” panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the “Logging” and “View” panels, and left-click
the [OK] .
Note:
• Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.
Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the “Logging” area.
Also, log data will be saved for displaying in the “Logbook” panel,
For example, if you left-click and select “At Noon”. The log data is saved “At noon”.
Contents of the logbook items are as follows:
• At Noon:
Data will be saved at
12:00 (LTM) when this
item is valid.
• Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after
set duration of time.
• Route Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to “Route Monitoring
Alarm”.
• Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to “Safety counter
Alarm” ”Dangerous
Alarm “ ”LAT.Limit Over
Alarm” “Chart Alarm”
“Area Alarm”,
• Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
• When press :
Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.
• AUTO Sail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to “Alarm System States” tab.

• Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Startup, Offset Reference Point,etc)
occurs.
• Latest display days:
It displays of the number of days of setting,setting logdatus.
• [Navtex Setting]:
The “Navtex Setting ” panel opens.
Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the “Station”, ECDIS
“Month/Year” and “Message” area. Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected “Station” will be filtered by the condition set
by the “Month/Year” and “Message”, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for
displaying on the chart.
The following “Navtex mark” will be displayed on the chart according to

the Navtex information.
• Station: You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name.
For example, if you select the letter “A”, the station name that begins with “A”
will be accepted. If you do not select “Filtering”, Messages of all the stations
will be not accepted
• Month/Year: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
• Message: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message.
If you do not select “Filtering”, the navigational warnings will be not accepted.
Note:
• The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.
• The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual

3.27 Own Ship’s setting
The following settings on own ship are explained here.
●Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
●Vector display and heading line at the primary position
●Danger detection vector and sector
●Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.
COG vector HDG vector
Danger detection sector
Danger detection vector
Own ship
Heading line
Own ship
Beam line
Tracking past position dots

Time labels
Tracking period
[Own Ship’s Setting Items]

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The “Own Ship Setting” panel is displayed.

3.27.1 Own Ship Symbol
You can select your ship’s shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.
Width of ship according to scale ECDIS
Length of ship according to scale
(a) (b)
[Your Ship Symbol]

2) In the “Own Ship Symbol” area, left-click either “Symbol” (a) or “Out Line” (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Ship’s Name: Own ship name can be set.

Receive value is displayed when receiving from AIS.

3.27.2 Vector Display at POSN1
The COG vector (vector of the vessel’s motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessel’s
motion through the water) can be displayed for your ship’s symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ship’s current speed in
minutes. For example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, the tip of the vector is the expected
position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current speed.
Vector length
Vector length
Vector time mark Vector time mark
HDG vector COG vector
[Vector Display and Heading line]

2) Set each item on the “Vector” area.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the [Display Ground-Referenced Velocity] on the
[Display Ground-Water-Referenced Velocity]. Then, left-click the [OK] on the “Own Ship
Setting” panel. Then, the panel will close.
Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.
Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.
COG/HDG vector time until the ship reaches

the expected position. (Min.1min,Max. 60 min.)
ｚ Turns ON/OFF the Vector Time Mark display.

(Min.1min,Max.6min)

3.27.3 Danger Detection Vector and …Sector
You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be
set the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the
sector can be set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is
shown in the rectangular shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails
at the current speed. The sector and its radius can be set as required.
Danger Detection Sector radius Danger Detection Vector length ECDIS
(1.0min to 30.0min (1.0min to 30.0min

or 0.1NM to 5.0NM) or 0.1NM to 5.0NM)
Danger Detection Sector angle Danger Detection Vector width

(0.0deg to 359.9deg) (30m to 250m)
[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]

2) Left-click each item on the “Danger Detection” panel.

Danger detection vector display ON/OFF
Danger detection sector display ON/OFF
[When left-clicking,the[Alarm Limit Setting]

panel opens].

3) Left-click the [Set Alarm Limit] , the “Alarm Limit Option” panel opens.
Vector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
vector.
Length:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
NM / min:
Change to unit of Length.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Width:
Set 30.0 to 250.0m.
Sector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
sector.
NM / min :
Change to unit of Radius.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Radius:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
Width:
Set 0.0 to 359.9deg.
4) Left-click the [Vector] and [Sector] and enter the value

• Vector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [length] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.
• Sector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [radius] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.
5) Left-click the [OK] on the “Alarm Limit Setting” panel, and then the [OK] on the “Own Ship
Setting” panel to close all panels,setting becomes valid.

3.27.4 Track and Time Label Display
The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of
information is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:
Time labels
Own ship (Primary position) Every 10 to 60 min.
ECDIS
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours) Tracking past position dots

(Every 3sec to 60min
or every 0.1NM to 10NM)
[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

2) In the "Track" area, left-click [Display Past Track] and [Display Time Label] to select them.
3) It enters value with the following item.[color][Track Period][Past POSN][Interbal].
Then, left-click the [OK] on the “Own Ship Setting” panel to close it.
Color of ship’s track (Red, Green, Blue,

Magenta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24 hour
OFF.
3, 5, 10, 30 sec.
1, 3, 5, 10,30,60 min.
0.1,0.2,0.3,0.5,1,3,5,10 NM
10, 30, 60 min.

3.27.5 Heading Line and Beam Line
You can set the Heading Line and Beam Line for display ship’s direction.

2) Left-click the item to select it.

Heading line
Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
Heading line
Beam line
When [Display Heading Line] is ON setting, Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
Heading Line and Beam line
3) Left-click the [OK] on the “Own Ship Option” panel to close it.

3.28 Chart Setting
You can set the various Chart Settings.
3.28.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu ECDIS
The “Chart Setting” panel opens. This panel consists of three tabs “View Common”, “View1”
and “View2”, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.
[“View Common” tab]
Note:
• You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] tab is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] tab is selected from the Table Editing
menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.

3.28.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab
The settings made here apply to “View1” and “View2” tabs for single/multi-view.
1) Left-click the item to Select.[OK] on the panel to close it.

a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [Base], [Standard] and [Other] on the display panel are
used. For detailed function, see 3.6 “Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)”.
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)
Boundary of the area
• Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized
line)
Boundary of the area

c) Redraw
• Border range: Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective
only when motion “True” is selected.) Border range can set from 30%
to 80%.
• Margin (Chart Rotation): This function is effective only when the mode “Course up” is
selected. (See 3.7.2 “Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP
Only)”.) The chart will be turned step-by-step by the angle
set here. Namely, if the [Margin (Chart Rotation)] is set to 10
degrees, the chart will be rotated each time the ship turns ECDIS
more than 10 degrees.
[Ex. The boarder range feature]
When set border range is 80%, When your ship reaches the border range,
the chart automatically shifts as follow:

d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Paper Chart: Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper
charts.
• Simplified: Simplified: A simple-ized symbol is displayed.
• Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the [Full Light
Line] is set to ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart
scale. When the chart is enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
• Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the
minimum scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also,
note that this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains
no information.
[When [Paper Chart]is selected]
marks displayed on Electronic

Chart Display indicate that there are
rocks or other dangerous obstacles
in the water area where the vessel is
sailing.
Display of marks depends on
the settings of Depth Alarm. For the
method of setting Depth Alarm, see
e) “Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)”.
[When [Simplified] is selected]

[Full Light Line setting]
• When [Full Light Line] is OFF
ECDIS
Range of lighthouse light
• When [Full Light Line] is ON
Range of lighthouse light

The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.

[Consider Scale Minimum setting]
When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
• When [Consider Scale Minimum] is ON
• When [Consider Scale Minimum] is OFF

e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Shallow Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
• Safety Contour: Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed
enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line
than you set is displayed.
• Safety Depth: Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced
displayed only at the value. ECDIS
• Deep Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
• Two Color Depth: Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into
four colors. However, when [Two Color Depth] is selected, the sea
depths are displayed in two colors, with Line of "Shallow Contour" and
"Safety Contour" displayed as one color, and and Line of "Deep
Contour" displayed as another color.("Safety Depth" is displayed at the
value). This feature is used to clearly indicate and divide the sea into
safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be taken during the
voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
• Shallow Pattern: The [Shallow Pattern] check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at
Shallow Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This
function is for highlighting areas that require special care during the
voyage.
Value:
Min:0m
Max:200m
[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]

Shallow Contour
Deep Contour
Land Land
shallow water
safety water
deep water
Safety Contour

[Two Color Depth setting]
• When [Two Color Depth] is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)
Deep Contour Shallow Contour
Land
Safety Depth(only the value)
Safety Contour
• When [Two Color Depth] is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)

[Shallow Pattern setting]
• When [Shallow Pattern] is ON (Shallow Pattern is displayed.)
Shallow Pattern
ECDIS
• When [Shallow Pattern] is OFF (Shallow Pattern disappears.)
f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database

The chart that C-MAP Ed 3 was imported can be chosen from.
The list of the C-MAP Ed.3 chart which

was imported in “Chart Portfolio” is
displayed.
When setting a truns ON/OFF in the

validity, a chart is displayed.
When choosing more than one, it rises
one above another and it is displayed.

3.28.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab
The “View1” tab setting is used for the [View 1] screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single
view screen (normal screen), or the "View 1" screen when you select multi view function to display
"View 1" and "View 2" screens. (For multi view function, see 3.11 “Displaying Chart in Various
Ways (Multi View/Wide View)”.)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON /OFF.

Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
[Cancel]: It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]: Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply]
[“View1” tab]
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for
the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 “Multi View Screen”)
Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

a) Type (Type of chart)
• S-57: S-57 chart is displayed. “C-MAP Ed.2” can be selected for simultaneous
display.
• C-MAP Ed.2: C-MAP Ed.2 chart is displayed. “S-57” can be selected for simultaneous
display.
• C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
• ARCS: ARCS chart is displayed.
Note:
• ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the [ARCS ECDIS
PIN] is correctly inputted when the "Navigation & Planning" is started.

• ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.
b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)
Expands characters.
Reduces characters.
The character size in the text to which the mark is attached can be changed.
Example: Land region
Small Large
Small Large Large Small
Smalld Large Large Small
Large
Small

c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)
Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.
[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Base], [Standard], [Other] mode
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Standard] or [Other] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Other] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.6 “Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP only).”
Display of each layer listed below can be turned ON/OFF:
Layers in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2
[S] objects:
• unkown object
• Land region, Sea area/named water area
• Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
• Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
• Swept area
• Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
• Navigation line
• Recommended track
• Ferry route
• Radar range, Radar line
• Restricted area
• Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
• Caution area, Fairway
• Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
• Anchorage area, Anchor berth
• Cable area, Pipeline area
• Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
• Daymark
• Navigational system mark
• topmarks
• light
• Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
• Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
• Quality of data,Low accuracy data
• Nautical publication information
• Coverage, Compilation scale of data
• Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
• Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
• Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
• Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
• Check point, Harbour facility
• Distance mark

• Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
• Sounding
• Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
• Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
• Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
• Fishing-facility
• Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
• Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
• Continental shelf area ECDIS
• Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area

• Fishery zone
• Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
• Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Layers in C-MAP Ed.3
[S] objects:
• Land region, Sea area/named water area
• Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
• Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
• Swept area
• Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
• Navigation line
• Recommended track
• Ferry route
• Radar range, Radar line
• Restricted area
• Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
• Caution area, Fairway
• Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
• Anchorage area, Anchor berth
• Cable area, Pipeline area
• Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
• Daymark

• Navigational system mark
• Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
• Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
• Quality of data,Low accuracy data
• Nautical publication information
• Coverage, Compilation scale of data
• Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
• Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
• Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
• Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
• Check point, Harbour facility
• Distance mark
• Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
• Sounding
• Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
• Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
• Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
• Fishing-facility
• Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
• Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
• Continental shelf area
• Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
• Fishery zone
• Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
• Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)

The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts
ON and OFF.
Text in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2

• Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
• Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
• Light description
• Note on chart data or nautical publication
• Nature of seabed
• Geographic names
• Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
• Height of islet or land feature
• Berth number
• National language

Text in C-MAP Ed.3
• Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
• Other text (Name of building so on)
• Light description
• Note on chart data or nautical publication
• Geographic names
• National language
Note: When setting "National Language" in the validity, it overlap with the other displaying ECDIS
information specified in English. Therefore, when setting "National Language" in the validity, set
the other Text check item in the invalid resemblance.

3.28.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab
The [View2] tab setting is used for the “View 2” screen. This settings apply to the “view 2” screen
(the second screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The “view 2” screen
will not be displayed if you use a “Single Veiw” screen (normal screen). (For multi view function,
see 3.11 “Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View)”.)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.

Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
[Cancel]: It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]: Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply].
• The setting contents are the same as for [View 1] panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:
• Type (Type of chart) • Layer • Text • Text Size
Note:
• [View2-Type] doesn't change with [View1-Type] and it functions.

Multi screen view statuses:
The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area
for the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 “Multi View Screen”)
ECDIS
Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view
3.28.2 Other Chart Setting

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The “Other Chart Setting” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.
The item which removed a check become hidden.

3.28.3 Save Chart Setting
This function can save the setting contents of [Chart Setting].
1. In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(3) Save Chart Setting].
2. [Save Chart Setting] panel is displayed.
• Name can be entered to 15 characters.
• Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
the saving setting can be loaded.
see 3.28.4 “Chart Setting List”.
• The following set value is saved.

[View Common] tab
･ Display Category
･ Area Boundary
･ Depth Alarm
･ Redraw
･ Chart Symbol
[View1/View2] tab
･ Type
･ Text Size
･ Layer
･ Text

3.28.4 Chart Setting List
This feature can load the set value which saved in [Save Chart Setting].
1. In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
2. Chart panel and a saving setting list are displayed.
• [Load]: Selected setting can be loaded.
• [Delete]: Selected setting can be deleted.
ECDIS
• [Close]: [Chart Setting List] is closes.

3.29 Chart Abbreviations
Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An “Information” panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.

3.30 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart
You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart
here in "Navigation & Planning" screen or you merge it when importing with the "Chart Portfolio" is
selectable in the setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see attached “Chart Portfolio”.
1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [Standard] or [Other].( A part is displayed in
[Base].)
ECDIS
[Standard] or [Other] is selected.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order. I
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The “Accept Updates” panel opens.

3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.
If you want to display and check the updating objects, select chart to left-click the [Show].
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.
Accept updating objects

by left-clicking the [OK]
on the “Accept
Updates”panel.
Updating objects will be The updating objects are merged

displayed in red. with the original chart and its color is
changed from red to normal one.
4) Left-click the [OK] .

The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.

3.31 Graphical Index
Graphical Index is a function to display the index of SENC stored by the system.

Select [MENU] and then [(6) Chart] – [(7) Graphical Index] in that order.
Then chart index is displayed on the chart and “Graphical Index” panel is displayed.
2) Left-click on the chart, the "Graphical Index Information"panel of the clicked place is displayed.
ECDIS
Graphical Index
"Graphical Index Information"panel of

the clicked place

3) To want to change display function, select turns ON/OFF and select [Apply].
Display ENC Data:

Switch Display ENC Data in Graphical Index.
Display Chart Name:

Switch Display the Chart Name. If this function is
effective, Chart Name is displayed upper right in
the chart index.
Chart Boundary:
Select display index in either resolution level.
The boundary of the chart to have made valid is
displayed.
Overview Low Resolution
General
Coastal
Approach
Harbour
Berthing High Resolition
2) To ending graphical index mode, Left-click on the [Close]. Then, the chart display returns to
original condition.

3.32 Setting Radar Options
3.32.1 Setting of RADAR
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The “Radar Option” panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.
Note:
• For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
• The “Rader Option” panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.
IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals from
other radars when they are superimposed over the
selected radar signal.
Gain Adjust/Sea Adjust/Rain Adjust/Video

You can adjust these items using the dials on the operation
panel other than using the dialog box
To Adjust the Radar Image Using the “Radar Option” Panel:

1) Select value with the scroll bar.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Radar Option”
panel.

3.32.2 Adjusting RADAR Range and Bearing
Adjust the RADAR Range and Bearing according to the following procedure.
1) Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(5)Code Input] in that order.
2) The “Code Input” panel opens. After inputting [9], left-click [OK] button.
3) Select [Menu] - [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(2)Adjust]
4) The “Adjust” panel opens.
z Adjust the Bearing with right side of [Bearing Adjustment]

Upside scroll: RADAR echo circles clockwise.
Downside scroll: RADAR echo circles counterclockwise.
z Adjust the Range with right side of [Range Adjustment]

Upside scroll: Range of echo grows to bigger.
Downside scroll: RADAR echo grows to smaller.

Tip of RADAR Range and Bearing
① Adjusting Bearing
Expand the screen display. Then, adjust Heading echo to Bearing.
ECDIS
Heading echo
② Adjusting Range
Expand the screen display. If there is the hole of own ship’s echo,
adjust Range smaller until the hole disappears.
Hole of own
ship’s echo

3.32.3 Adjusting of Noise Level
The RADAR echo noise level can be adjust by the following methods.
5) Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(5)Code Input] in that order.
6) The “Code Input” panel opens. After inputting [9], left-click [OK] button.
7) Select [Menu] - [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(6) Radar Initial Setup]
8) The “Adjust” panel opens.
z Adjust the Bearing with right side of [ECHO Noise Level]

Upside scroll: RADAR echo noise level increases.
Downside scroll: RADAR echo noise level decreases.

z The following is example of echo noise displaying.
(The displaying of echo noise level is different from each RADAR Board.)
Main Noise Level：100
ECDIS

3.33 AIS/TT Setting
3.33.1 AIS/Target Track Setting
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
The “AIS/Tracking Target Setting” Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Note:
• For details on each setting item, refer to the “INSTRUCTION MANUAL for TT/AIS” to be used.
AIS/TT Past Position: CPA/TCPA Limit:

AIS/TT past position can be displayed It becomes valid when setting [AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm] to
in the set interval. [ACT]. Alarm is occurred when the target enters in each
[0.5min] [1min] [2min] [3min] [4min] setting range.
[0.1NM] [0.2NM] [0.5NM] [1NM]: It ・CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is distance between
displays in the set interval. own ship and target. CPA Limit setting range: 0.1 - 9.9NM
・TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) is time to own
ship and CPA of target. TCPA Limit setting range: 1 –
Display TT Vector:
99min
It displays TT Vector
when putting check.
AIS Lost Alarm
[OFF]: "Lost Alarm" not effect
[ACT&Danger]:
Active target and Danger target
[Danger]:
Danger target only
AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm:

[ACT]: Active target only
[ACT & Sleep]:
Active target and Sleep target
AIS Filter:
Target Number: Refer to “3) AIS Filter”
<AIS>
[OFF]: Label is not displayed
[ON]: Display only label of Activated AIS Target
[AIS Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed
[ship’s Name]:AIS Target name is display
<TT>
[OFF]: Label is not displayed
[ON]: Displays a label.
[TT Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed

Note:
• Tracking spots of AIS/TT are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.
* In case of built-in Target Track processing co-processor.

Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes able to be selected when making [Internal Target
Tracking function] ON.
Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes invalid when making [Internal Target Tracking
function] ON.
ECDIS
3) AIS Filter
High Priority filter for display:

• Ring: The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Ring" line.
• Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are
displayed.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Sector" line.
Heading line
Sector area
Ring area
Own ship
120nm
Note:
• Maximum number of visible targets are 300. For over 300 targets, at first the targets
attributed danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are
shown the nearest from own ship one by one.

It sets the range of Ring. It sets the range of Sector.
Minimum: 0.0 NM Minimum: 0.0 °
Maximum: 120.0 NM(MAX) Maximum: 359.9 °
It becomes valid when check is ON. It becomes valid when check is ON.
Filter Mode:
[OFF]: Regardless of the setting range,
AIS Target is displayed.
[Display]: Only AIS in the setting range is
displayed.
[Priority]: When AIS Target is displayed
above the maximum, AIS Target
which is the farthest from the
own ship is not displayed in turn.
Range which was set in Ring and Sector is

displayed when putting a check.
The priority of display is as follows when AIS Target is more than maximum.
① Numerical display Target
② CPA/TCPA Target
③ Target in AZ
④ Association Target
⑤ Activated Target
⑥ In CPA Limit setting range 1.TCPA sequence 2.CPA sequence 3.Number sequence
⑦ Out of CPA Limit setting range 1.Range sequence 2.Number sequence

TT symbols:
Item Symbol Color
Tracked target (Selectable)
Dangerous target Red (blink)

ECDIS
Object: (Selectable)
Lost target
Cross Line: Red (blink)
Initial acquisition mark (Selectable)
AIS symbols:
Item Symbol Color
Sleeping target (Selectable)
Activated target (Selectable)
Selected target (Selectable)
Dangerous target Red (blink)
Object: (Selectable)
Lost target
Cross Line: Red (blink)
COG (valiable length)
ROT (fixed length)
HDG (fixed length)

HDG
[Sleeping target] [Activated target]

Conditions for AIS lost targets:
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is
considered to be lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost
varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.
[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)

Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the moored 18 min
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the moored 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots and it is now changing the course 60 sec
Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots and it is now changing the course 36 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course 30 sec
[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)

Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 2 knots 18 min
Vessel of 23 knots or more 180 sec
When an AIS dangerous target is lost and the target data cannot be received for 1 minute, the
target and target data are deleted.
Dangerous Target cam be showed ,only when ARPA is received.

3.33.2 Association Setting
When the ship that transmits AIS information is displayed with the AIS device,
both of the TT symbol received AIS target symbol and radar are plotted. Setting for ECDIS to treat as the
same target is set on this "Association Setting"panel because information on originally the same ship is
shown.
ECDIS
Association Setting to the Association

target on the chart.
Association symbol

Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
The “Association Setting” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. To close the panel, Left-click the [OK] on the panel.

Association Target can be set in valid or invalid.
It becomes valid when putting a check.
It is connected with the [Association] of the display
panel.
[Synchronized with TTD] is valid only the AIS data

receive from the Radar
It preference which of AIS or TT and it can be set.
It sets [Bearing][Range][Course][Speed].
The setting range is as the following:

[Bearing]: 0.0°- 9.9°
[Range]: 0m - 999m
[Course]: 0°- 99°
[Speed]: 0kn - 99kn
Association is valid to 125 % of the set value.

3.34 Shifting Own Ship Position
During voyage, you can shift own ship’s position on the chart using one of the following methods:
●Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor(Select to [Cursor])
●Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude(Select to [Cursor])
●Shifts by entering the offset value (Select to [Enter Offset])
ECDIS
Shifted own ship
When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the
position after the offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.

Please set the following items:
Position to display the reference point:

The position can be modified by left-clicking the select each column of [LAT] or [LON].
MIN Scale: Sets the minimum scale in which the “reference point mark” is displayed.
MAX Scale: Sets the maximum scale in which the “reference point mark” is displayed.
Comment: Comments for a “reference point mark”

can be input.
OK: “Reference Point Mark” will be displayed in the

specified location, and close this panel.
Cancel: “Reference Point Mark” will be not displayed.
Apply: “Reference Point Mark” will be displayed in
the specified location, and keep this panel
displayed.
Plot Type: Select EP/DR.
Source:
Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed
for “Reference Point Mark”.
Delete: Delete in selected GPS/DGPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Astronomical/MFDF/Transit/GNSS/
“Reference Point Line of Position/Visual Bearing LOP’S/Visual Range LOP’S
Mark”
Time: Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.
Reference Point Mark
Type of reference positioning
• For viewing the information on"Reference Point Mark" or editing/deleting "Reference Point Mark",
see 3.14 “Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship
position, the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the
real one, and accidents may result. ECDIS
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position
panel on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message “Position
Shift” aralm is displayed in the message display area. Check these
indications, and cancel the offset function if necessary.
3.34.1 Shifting Using the Cursor

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The “Confirmation” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] .
The ship offset cursor appears.

3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position
you want, and then left-click there.
4) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is
displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.

3.34.2 Shifting by Entering the Position
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] .

3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift to that position.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel] .
To clear the offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
3.34.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The “Enter Offset” panel opens.
2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] .

3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel].
3.34.4 Canceling the Ship Offset

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position
display on the panel changes from sky blue to gray.

3.35 Printing Display
(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or
panels displayed on the screen.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(5) Print ] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
The “Print” panel opens.
2) Set for printing and left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.
3.36 Saving the Screen

An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
* When the Lost target, Danger TT Target, Danger AIS Target is in the blink condition, it isn't
captured.
* Radar echo is captured in the contained condition.
Drive_YY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp
Year Date Minute

Month Hour Second
(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2008, If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6
June 2008,it preserves at the E drive. the file name would be“E_080606105015.bmp”

3.37 Displaying the Startup Menu
(Exit the avigation & Planning)
After the “Navigation & Planning” is exited, the “Startup Menu” panel will be displayed.
For the “Startup Menu”, panel see 3.3.2 “Selecting the Startup Menu.”

Select [MENU]－[(0) Exit]in that order.
The “Confirmation” panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] .
“Navigation & Planning” is exited, and the “Startup Menu” will be displayed.

4
Route
Planning
4-1
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during
voyage is explained in 4.2.
• For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.12 “Selecting ROUTE and To WPT”.
• To set route options, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.
Note:
• If you make a Track line more than limit longitude distance, track line can not displayed and “Not
Allowed” message is indicated.
• If you make a Track line more than 80 degree latitude distance, track line can not displayed
4.1 Route Planning

You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it.
Edition is possible by using either method.
●Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WPT value in the WPT entry table. Using the [View Sync]
button, the current WPT can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
●Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WPT on the chart.
Editing Screen and Editing Menu:

When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing
screen is displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it
opens by rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the same way as for normal
menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly
different from those of menus.
Note:
• The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.
Route Name and Extension of File:

Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as “.” and “ ” that cannot generally be used in file names cannot
be used as route names.
Extension of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as
follows.
Route-01.rtn
4 Route Planning 4-2

Route shown on the Screen:
W000
Planned course
W001
ECDIS
Planned speed [kt]
Leg
Port side (in red line)

and port side width
Starboard side (in green line) Arrival radius

and starboard side width
WPT : Way Point
Note:
• For each default value, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.
4-3 4 Route Planning

4.1.1 Setting the Route Options
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [Menu] - [(4) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the “Route Plan Setting” panel opens.
2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.
UTC display LMT display

b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is
displayed at WPT during route monitoring.
When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):
ECDIS
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:

c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
• XTL PORT: Port side width
• XTL STBD: Starboard side width
• Arrival Radius: Arrival radius
• Speed: Planned ship’s speed
• Sail: RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
• ROT: Turn rate
• Turn Radius: Turn radius
• Time Zone: Time zone
d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than
the set latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.
When the GC leg between W002 and W003

exceeds the maximum latitude (60°N)
60°N
When the maximum latitude is 60° or more, a GC leg exceeding 60° can be input.
W003 and W004 are added for limiting the

GC leg to the maximum latitude (60°N).
(RL leg between W003 and W004)
60°N
Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60°, so a leg exceeding 60° is
not input.
e) Check Safety in Editing

During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)
Note:
• The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120° and more in longitudinal direction.

f) Route Type
Select a route type when making a route file.
Normal route TCS route
ECDIS
WOP
WOL
Note:
In editing the route, "View Ship's Parameter" can be displayed.
"View Ship's Parameter" dialog is only a display.
・ In Route Editing menu (Table / Graphic)

Select [(4) Route] - [(5) View Ship’s Parameter] in that order.
Then, the “View Ship’s Parameter” panel opens.

4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
●About the Table Editing mode
●Table editing menu and button functions
●Operation flowchart
●Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode

Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.
[Table Editing Screen]
How to open the Table Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.

How to exit the table editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Table
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)

(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
ECDIS
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 4.1.2.4
(2) Open 4.1.2.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.2.6
(2) TCS 4.1.2.6
(3) 2G TCS 4.1.2.6
(4) Save 4.1.2.4
(5) Save as 4.1.2.5
(6) Export 4.1.2.7
(7) Print WPT 4.1.2.1
(0) Exit from Route Planning 4.1.2.4
(2) Edit (4) Sort Reversely 4.1.2.4
(3) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.2
(2) TT2 3.3.9.2
(3) AIS 3.3.9.2
(4) All 3.3.9.2
(6) All List 3.3.9.4
(8) Target Track (1) Target Track Setting 3.3.9.5
(2) File Operation 3.3.9.6
(1) Message (1) Addressed Message 3.3.9.7
(2) Broadcast Message 3.3.9.7
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.8
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.8
(4) Route (5) View Ship’s Parameter 4.1.1
(0) Setting… 4.1.1

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree – (Continued）
(2) Home 3.4.1
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(0) Setting… (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.28.1
(6) Main (1) Maneuver Curve
3.19
/Remove Maneuver Curve
(4) LOP (1) Create LOP 3.22
(2) Delete All LOP 3.22
(5) Print 3.35
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
(0) Setting… 7.11

Context Menu (Right Click on the chart display area)
Abort 3.1.1.3
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
Zoom Area 3.5.1
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.2
EBL1 3.15.2.3
EBL2 3.15.2.3
VRM1 3.15.2.4
ECDIS
VRM2 3.15.2.4
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.6
EBL1 3.15.2.7
EBL2 3.15.2.7
VRM1 3.15.2.8
VRM2 3.15.2.8

(2) Button functions
Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when inserting a new WPT.
Left-click when deleting a WPT.
Left-click to divide the leg.
Left-click to set default value on following columns.

PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.
Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking,
warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available for TCS mode only.
Left-click when you want to display the WPT during editing.
Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name
column contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.
Name : You can enter name in the Name column.

WPT to WPT : WPT to WPT information is
displayed.
Total : W000 to WPTn information is displayed.
It shifts to Graphic Editor.

When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Graphic Editor.

(3) Context Menu on Table
When right-clicking on the table, a context menu is displayed. Operation is applied to the line which
displayed a menu.
Context Menu
ECDIS
Left-click when inserting a new WPT.
Left-click to divide the leg.
Left-click to set default value on following columns.

PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.

4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.
(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)
Start
Clear any route if

Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
displayed.
Enter the Table

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1) Table
Editing mode.
Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.

Left-click [New].
Table editing operation

.
W000 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.) W000 entry screen
Left-click the next

WPT No.
The following items are automatically

W001 entry displayed. Change, if necessary.
Position (Lat./Lon.) • XTL(PORT/STBD)
• ARR RAD
• SPD[kn]
Repeat WPT entry • Sail (RL/GC)
until the final WPT. • Time Zone
• Name
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close] Exit the Table Editing mode.
End

(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)
Start
Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Table In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1)
Editing mode. Table Editor] in that order.
Select a route file you want to edit. ECDIS

Left-click [Open].
Select route type.
Table editing operation
Edit the WPT table.
When you want to change the file name.
To save without chang- Left-click [Save as]

Left-click [Save]
ing the file name. in the menu.
Enter the new file

name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Table Editing mode.
End

4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (1) “Making a new route file (Table Editor)” in 4.1.2.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor”.
(1) Unloading the selected route before starting

Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
Then, the Table Editing screen opens.
[MENU] Button
• When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Table editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

(4) Making a route
1) Left-click the “LATatitude” and “LONongitude” in the position column, and enter the position for
W000.
2) Left-click the next WPT No. (i.e., W001). ECDIS
Then, the same position as the previous WPT (i.e. W000) is automatically set in the position
column. Also, default values are displayed in the other columns.
WPT can be made up to 511.
Position: Latitude/Longitude
XTL PORT: Port side width
XTL STBD: Starboard side width
ARR RAD: Arrival radius (This item isn't displayed in the TCS setting.)
SPD [kn]: Ship’s speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
ROT [°/min]: The ship's rotation over every 1 minute (This item is automatically computed.)
Turn RAD: The turning radius
Time Zone: Time zone
Name: Comment entry column.
The contents of column are changed by left-clicking the [Name] drop-down list
button and then [Name], [WPT to WPT], or [Total].
Name: You can enter a comment.

WPT to WPT: The Name column changes as follows:
CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Distance from waypoint to
waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint
Total: The Name column changes as follows:

CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Total distance from waypoint 0
to the specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to
the specified waypoint

[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]
(5) Saving the route file

1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The “Save as Route File” panel opens.
2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
Close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing buttons
are cleared from the screen.
• The route file can be edited even after it is saved.
Note:
• The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120° and more in longitudinal
direction.

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:
Left-click WPT No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
In the context menu

Right-click on the table and it selected [Insert WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.
Then, the new WPT will be added to the WPT No. 2, and the W002 and later
WPTs will move by one line downwardly.
ECDIS
Left-click W002, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Delete WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.
Then, the W002 is deleted and W003 and later WPTs will move by one line
upwardly.

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu: -- Continued:
After entering WPT(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
The “Route Warning Check” panel opens.
Left-click “Select Leg” or “All Leg” and left click the
[OK] button. (When you use “Select Leg”, you
should select a WPT to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the
displayed chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP
charts that cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route
Check] result display box.
●[For “Select Leg” ]
●[For “All Leg” ]

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:
If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.

The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the
chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.
ECDIS
Shown in red
Shown in red
You can make a route while watching the WPT on the chart. For example, above
chart is made with the [View SYNC] button left-clicked to set it ON.
This button is available
for TCS mode only.

1) Left-click the WPT with GC leg you want to divide in the WPT table.
In the Table Editing Button
Select [Divide] Button in that order.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Divide] from the context menu
for Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't
displayed.
(When you want to divide the leg between W002 and W003, select
W003.)
Then, the “Divide Route W002 to W003” panel will open.
• Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

• Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg
type is changed from “GC” to “RL”.)

[Before dividing]
ECDIS
[After dividing]

[Before dividing RL leg]
After dividing]

[Editing the Course and Distance in the “WPT to WPT” display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WPT to WPT]. You can edit the values of CRS (Course to the next WPT) and
DIST (Distance to the next WPT) columns.
ECDIS
Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the W001 are modified. As a
result, the position of the W002 changes according to this modification. Since the
position of the W002 changes, the Cse and Dist values of W002 for W003 also
change.
W002 (After modification)
W003
W001
W002 (Before modification)
[Editing the ETA in the “Total” display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WPT from
W000) column.
When you edit the WPTn’s ETA, the ETA and ETD of W000 to WPTn-1 are
calculated based on the WPTn’s ETA, and the calculated ETA values are
displayed in the table.

[Sort Reversely] In the Table Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Before reverse sorting
After reverse sorting

It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.
In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor
mode.
・When editing the route.
・When opening the created route.
Editorial contents and a file name and so on are taken over to "Graphic Editor".
ECDIS

4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) “Editing the route file (Table Editor)” in 4.1.2.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor”.

• You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
- When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The “Open Route File” panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.

When saving without changing the file name:
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:

1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel. ECDIS
• If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see
(5) “Saving the route file” in 4.1.2.4 “Making a New Route File (Table Editor)”.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with “rot_” can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.2.7 “Exporting Route Files”).
CSV format:
For each WPT of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this
file. You can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order.
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import.
-
Note:
• Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the “Save As” panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be
exported already has a name, save it as “rot_[date and time].csv.” If you wish to change the file name,
follow the naming rules such as “rot_[date and time].csv (normal route).” Left-click on the [OK] button
to save the route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file “test.rtn,” its
name will be set to “rot_[date and
time].csv.”
- ”

Note:
・ Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
・ In the following case, Export becomes invalid.
･ When not creating more than two WPT by New
･ In case of not opening a route
ECDIS

4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
●About the Graphic Editing mode
●Graphic editing menu and button functions
●Operation flowchart
●Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the
Graphic Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPTs. The position
(latitude/longitude) of the cursor is shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you
have entered the WPT, you can move the WPT with the [Move] button or edit the WPT position with the
[Info] button. Also, the route you have made can be edited with the Table Editor.
• For positioning the WPTs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.
[Graphic Editing Screen]
How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:

Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the Graphic Editing mode will open the
special menu for Graphic Editor.

How to exit the graphic editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the
Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic

Editor)
(1) Graphic editing menu ECDIS
The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 4.1.3.4
(2) Open 4.1.3.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.3.6
(2) TCS 4.1.3.6
(3) 2G TCS 4.1.3.6
(4) Save 4.1.3.5
(5) Save as 4.1.3.5
(6) Export 4.1.3.7
(7) Print WPT 4.1.3.1
(0) Exit from Route Planning 4.1.3.1
(2) Edit (1) Use EBL/VRM 4.1.3.8
(2) Use Assistant-Circle 4.1.3.4
(3) Divide Leg
(4) Sort Reversely 4.1.3.4
(3) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.2
(2) TT2 3.3.9.2
(3) AIS 3.3.9.2
(4) All 3.3.9.2
(6) All List 3.3.9.4
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.8
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.8
(4) Route (3) Distance Measurement 3.12.2
(5) View Ship’s Parameter 4.1.1
(0) Setting… 4.1.1

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(2) Home 3.4.1
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
3.19
/Remove Maneuver Curve
(4) LOP 3.22
(5) Print 3.35
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
(0) Setting… 7.11
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting… 7.6

Context Menu
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will
be displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.
ECDIS
(It is set to some cursor mode.) (A cursor mode is not set.)
Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Abort 3.1.1.3
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
Zoom Area 3.5.1
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.2
EBL1 3.15.2.3
EBL2 3.15.2.3
VRM1 3.15.2.4
VRM2 3.15.2.4
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.6
EBL1 3.15.2.7
EBL2 3.15.2.7
VRM1 3.15.2.8
VRM2 3.15.2.8

(2) Button functions
Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a

printer)
Left-click when adding a WPT to the W000 or the to the last WPT.
Left-click when inserting a WPT in the course of the route.

Left-click when moving a WPT.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WPT or leg.
This button is available for TCS mode only.
It shifts to Table Editor.

When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Table Editor.

4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.
(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)
: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.

Start
ECDIS
Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] -
Editing mode. [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.

Left-click [New].
Graphic editing operation
W000 entry
(using the cursor)
Next WPT entry

(using the cursor)
Repeat WPT entry

until the final WPT.
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End

(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)
Start : The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] -
Editing mode. [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.
Select route type.
Graphic editing operation
Edit the WPT.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

Left-click [Save] To save without chang- in the menu.
ing the file name.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End

4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)
This explanation is made according to (1) “Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)” in 4.1.3.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)”.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

ECDIS
• When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
How to save the route:

The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) “Saving the route file” in 4.1.2.4 “Making a New Route File (Table Editor)”.

(4) Making a route
Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix
the EBL/VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM
Keys and Dials”.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display
panel.
Note:
• If [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To
turn on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using
supplemental lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(2) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(1) Use
EBL/VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.

1) Entering WPTs:
Left-click at the WPT (W000) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next
WPT (W001).
Then, left-click there.
[W000fixing/W000 to W001] [W001 fixing]
ECDIS
[W001 to W002] [W002 fixing]

How to shift the chart during entering WPTs:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart
while entering WPTs.
2) Terminating WPT entry:

Left-click twice quickly to terminate WPT entry. (You can also terminate the operation by
selecting [Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)
[Left-clicking twice quickly to stop entry] [The route you have entered]
Note:
• If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another
panel exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.
Creating routes using EBL/VRM:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.
Entering position
Line drawn from

the previous WPT
First, left-click on the center of Then, decide where the EBL/VRM

EBL/VRM. intersection will be and left-click on it.

Creating routes using Assistant Circle:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WPT input using a supplemental line is enabled.
1) W000 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own
ship’s position will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the
circle’s radius and supplemental line to W000, and left-click.
ECDIS
Cursor Supplemental line
Supplemental line W000 W000
This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.
W000
Supplemental line
3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circle’s radius, and left-click. The
intersection between the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WPT.
W001
Supplemental line
W000

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:
Deleting the WPT:

1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to delete. Then, the selected WPT is deleted.
[Select W003.] [W003 is deleted.]
ECDIS
Adding a WPT to the W000 or to the last WPT:

1) Left-click the [Add] button
2) Left-click the W000 or the last WPT. and rotate the trackball to move the
cursor for additional WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.
[Select W002 (the last WPT).] [W003 is added.]

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:
Moving a WPT (other than W000 and the last WPT):

1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to move.and rotate the trackball to move the cursor
for moving the WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.
[Select W002.] [Move W002.]
[W002 is moved.]

Inserting a new WPT between WPTs:

1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button
2) Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WPT there. and rotate the
trackball to insert a new WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT. A new
WPT is inserted and the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.] [Make a new WPT.]
ECDIS
[New WPT is inserted as W002.]

Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:

Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.
Designating coordinates by entering position

1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type on
the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance

inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type
on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The “Bearing/Distance” panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button.
the position is designated.
Note:
• When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do
not require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.

Displaying/Modifying information of WPT or leg:

1) Left-click the [Property] button.
2) Left-click the WPT.
When “WPT” is selected, [Edit Waypoint] panel opens, while [Edit leg 1] panel
opens when “Leg” is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WPT. If
you want to return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default]
button. (The default value is set in the “Route Plan Option” panel. See 4.1.1
“Setting the Route Options”.) After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel. ECDIS
[Information for WPT.]
[Information for Leg.]

It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.
In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor mode.
・When editing the route.
・When opening the created route.
[Sort Reversely]
In the Graphic Editing mode

Then, the WPT is in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) “Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)” in 4.1.3.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)”.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

ECDIS
- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper
part on screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The “Open Route File” panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when
you make a new route file.

When saving without changing the file name:
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:

1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with “rot_” can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.3.7 “Exporting Route Files”).

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start
file import.
ECDIS
Note:
• Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the “Save As” panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as “rot_[date and time].csv.” If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as “rot_[date and time].csv (normal route).” Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file “test.rtn,
” its name will be set to “rot_[date and
time].csv.”
Note:
• Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and
Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation
panel. (You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)
Note:
• Before starting, be sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.
Be sure that the check mark is attached.
The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is
set to ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.
2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
Left-click
Line drawn from own ship

3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned W000, and left-click
there.
Left-click
ECDIS
4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the W000 and EBL/VRM intersection.)
(This circle is not displayed.)

Left-click

5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WPT (W001), and left-click
there.
Left-click
Green line
Red line
(Starboard side)
(Port side)
6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WPT.
How to Edit the Route:

After pressing the [Add] or [Insert/Move WPT] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a
WPT in the same EBL/VRM operation as above.

4.2 Creating an Alternate Route
During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen.
The alternate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor.
The operation buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those
for the Graphic Editor. So, the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3
“Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor”. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic
Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.
Note: ECDIS
• Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route,
the original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
“TEMP”.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the “Save as” menu, the alternate route is not replaced with
the original route. (For details, see (3) “Saving the alternate route file” in 4.2.2 “Creating
Alternate Route”.)
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart

Start
During voyage Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.
(Route is displayed.)
Enter Create Alternate In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route]
Route mode. in that order.
Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
Alternate route To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.
making operation
: For [Property] button, see 4.1.3 “Route Planning Using

the Graphic Editor”.
Left-click the [Save]

button The original route is replaced with the alternate route.
(If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use “Save as” menu. In this case, the original
route remains as it is. For details, see (3) “Saving the alternate route file” in
4.2.2 “Creating Alternate Route”.)
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.
End

4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route
The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that,
during creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPTs are altered:
• Position of W001 (Moved)
• W002 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.)
• W006 (Added one WPT to the last WPT.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.
[Original Route]
[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]
W006:
Added to the last WPT.
Alternate Route
W001:
Position changed.
W002:
Inserted.

(1) Alternate Route Editing mode
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for
Graphic Editor.)
[Alternate Route Editing Screen]
Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu: ECDIS
On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode

Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic
Editor.)
(2) Creating Alternate Route

The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens.
(When you use the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using
EBL/VRM Keys and Dials”.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
Note:
• Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from
the original route.

Moving the WPT for Alternate Route:
2) Left-click the WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving W001. Then, left-click
to fix the new W001 for the alternate route.
[Select W001.]
[Move W001.]
How to shift the chart during making an

alternate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button
down, and then move the cursor to scroll
the chart while creating alternate routes.
[Fix the new W001 for alternate route.]
Alternate route is created. (Orange)
Moved new WPT (W001).

Inserting the WPT for Alternate Route:
2) Left-click the leg between W001 and W002 and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
inserting a new WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT. New W002 is inserted and the number of
the later WPTs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.]
ECDIS
[Position the new W002.]
[New WPT is inserted as W002.]
Inserted WPT (W002).

Adding the WPT for Alternate Route:
You can add the WPT to the first WPT or to the last WPT.
1) Left-click the [Add] button.
2) Left-click the first WPT or last WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional
WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT.
[Select the first WPT or last WPT.]
[Position the new first WPT or last WPT.]
[W006 is added as the last
Added WPT (W006).

Deleting the WPT from Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click the WPT you want to delete. The selected WPT will be deleted.
(In the example, W002 is deleted. You can also delete any WPT of the alternate route, such as
W003.)
[Select W002.] [W002 is deleted.]
ECDIS
You can use this button to display and edit the selected WPT and leg.
For details, see “[Property] button” (page 4-50) of (4) “Making a route” in
4.1.3.4 “Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)”.
Sort Reversely of WPTs:

In the Alternate Editing mode
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Safety Check of WPTs:
When checking the safety of the route, click “Safety Check” button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Limit Check of WPTs:
When checking the Limit of the route, click “Limit Check” button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear when exceeding the demarcation of the sailing
feature of the own ship

(3) Saving the alternate route file
a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):
Note:
• In this case, the file is saved as “TEMP”, and, when you close the file, the alternate route
“TEMP” becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate
route “TEMP”.

Then, the alternate route file is save as “TEMP”.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route “TEMP”.
b) When saving as the new file ([(5) Save as] menu):
Note:
• In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the
original route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.
1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save as] in the order.
2) Enter the file name and comment.

4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.

5
Chart Editing
5-1
This chapter describes how to create user maps and how to manually update charts.
User Map
User map can be created and displayed on other charts. User map information contains various objects
(symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User map can also be edited and updated. Also, you can merge
multiple maps together to create one user map.
The following figures show how to use user map:
Example 1: Example 2: Example 3:
User Map 2 You can merge as

User Map 1 User Map 2
User Map 1 one user map.
Chart Chart
Chart
How to Display the User Map:

To display the user map, see 3.10 “Displaying a User Map”.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) Select User Map] in the order.
Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated. When you save data after
manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.
Enter the date. You can check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
information.
Unlike User Map Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore,
the objects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the
chart. For the method of hiding the objects, see 5.5.3 “Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update
Operation)”.
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the
chart.
• The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
• 3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
• The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.
Note:
• ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 charts cannot be updated manually.
• The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or C-MAP Ed.2 chart can be used commonly in those
charts.
5 Chart Editing 5-2

5.1 Chart Edit Mode
There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow
the procedure below to start there modes.
User Map Edit mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.
A map edit screen as shown below will be displayed. Use this screen to create/edit a user map.
[User Map Editing Screen]
ECDIS
Manual Update mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering
screen on the left are slightly different). Use this screen to manually update a chart.
How to open the Chart Edit menu:

In User Map Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen. The following Chart Edit menu
will be displayed at the top of the screen.
5-3 5 Chart Editing

5.2 Menus and Button Functions
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User
Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.
Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 5.3.2.1
(2) Open 5.3.2.2
(3) Import (1) CSV file(WGS84) 5.3.2.4
(2) CSV file(TOKYO) 5.3.2.4
(3) OLD Format 5.3.2.4
(4) Export
(5) Save 5.3.2
(6) Save as 5.3.2
(7) Merge 5.3.2.3
(0) Exit from User Map Editor 5.3.2.1
(2) Edit (4) Use EBL/VRM 5.3.2
(0) Setting
(3) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.2
(2) TT2 3.3.9.2
(3) AIS 3.3.9.2
(4) All 3.3.9.2
(6) All List 3.3.9.4
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.8
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.8
(2) Home 3.4.1
5 Chart Editing 5-4

Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(6) Chart (3) User Setting (2) My Port List 3.8.2
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(0) Setting… (1) S-57/ C-MAP / ARCS 3.28.1
3.19
/Remove Maneuver Curve ECDIS
(4) LOP 3.22
(5) Print 3.35
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Ring 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
(0) Setting… 3.27.1
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting… 7.6
(0) INS Setting…
5-5 5 Chart Editing

Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type
when right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 “Entering Objects” for
details on the various cursor types.
Buttons for the same operations:

［Move］
［Delete］
［Add Vertex］
［Insert/Move Vertex］
［Delete Vertex］
［Property］
When not edit mode (“Cursor” column is displayed nothing)
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way

point, and enter an object in that position.
When edit mode (“Cursor” column is displayed operation)
5 Chart Editing 5-6

. Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Abort 3.1.1.3
S-57/ C-MAP /ARCS Information 3.13
Zoom Area 3.5.1
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.2
EBL1 3.15.2.3
EBL2 3.15.2.3
VRM1 3.15.2.4
VRM2 3.15.2.4
ECDIS
EBL2/VRM2 3.15.2.6
EBL1 3.15.2.7
EBL2 3.15.2.7
VRM1 3.15.2.8
VRM2 3.15.2.8
5-7 5 Chart Editing

5.2.2 Button Functions
In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons
are used in User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Map Edit mode]
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
① Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Map Edit Mode.
During user map edit:

②
Left-click on this button to create a new user map file.
Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual
③
update).
④ Left-click on this button to save a created user map.
⑤ Left-click when moving an object.
⑥ Left-click when deleteing an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding
⑦
line to the area.
⑧ Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
⑨ It deles the part of the object.
⑩ Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
[Manual Update mode]
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
① Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
During manual update:

②
Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.
Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual
③
update).
④ Left-click on this button to save the updating chart.
⑤ Left-click when moving an object.
⑥ Left-click when deleteing an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or an area surrounding line
⑦
to the area.
⑧ Left-click when inserting a segment into the line..
⑨ It deles the part of the object.
⑩ Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
5 Chart Editing 5-8

5.3 User Map Editor Operation
This section describes how to edit user maps. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4
“Manual Update Operation.”
Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user map file and when you open a
created file. Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of
chapter 4 “Route Planning.”
5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit

(1) Creating a new user map file
Start
ECDIS
Start User Map Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
Open a new user map file.
[New] button.
Map edit operation
• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects” .
• Areas
• Texts
Left-click on the Enter a file name and

[Save] button. a comment.
Select a datum in the

“Datum Conversion”
panel.
Left-click on the
Exit User Map Edit mode.
[Close] button.
End
5-9 5 Chart Editing

(2) Editing a user map file
Start
Start User Map Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
Open user map file you wish to edit.
[Open] button.
Map edit operation
• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects”.
• Areas
• Texts
When overwriting When saving under a new file name

Left-click on the
[Save] button. Select [Save as] from
the menu.

panel.
Left-click on the
Exit User Map Edit mode.
[Close] button.
End
5 Chart Editing 5-10

5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map
File operations are different when you create a new user map and when you edit an existing user map.
This section describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 “Flow of User Map Edit”). This
section also describes how to merge user map and how to import user map files.
• Creating a new user map -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
• Editing a user map -> See Section 5.3.2.2
• Merging user map -> See Section 5.3.2.3
• Importing user map -> See Section 5.3.2.4
Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. ("Simple Line", "Warning Line", "Polygon", "Warning Area"
counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20000, the "Max Point" notice occurs and it isn't possible
to do the addition of the object.
ECDIS
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map

Follow the procedure below to create a new user map.
(1) Entering the Map Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in the order.
How to exit the user map editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Map Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit
from User Map Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Map Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Map Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, or left-click any position on the map.
[Map Editing Menu]
(2) Opening a new user map file

1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
5-11 5 Chart Editing

(3) Entering objects
1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).
If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.
2) Proceed to 5.5 “Entering Objects” and enter objects.

• After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.
(4) Saving a user map file

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save], [(6) Save as] in that order.
The “Save as” panel opens.
2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.

3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.
Then, the “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
• Select Datum:
ECDIS
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
• Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
Then, the system exit the User Map Editing mode.
(5) Exiting the User Map Editing mode

1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.
2) When you are not operating in the editing, this editor is closed and changed to normal mode.
3) When you are operating in the editing, the confirmation dialog is displayed.
It returns to the edit-display.
It changes to the save operation. User Map Editor is closed and

(See (4) Saving a user map file) editing contents is canceled.

5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map
Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user map.
(1) Starting User Map Editing mode

(2) Opening a user map file

1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
The “Open Chart File” panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map file will be displayed.
(3) Entering objects

(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).


• After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.

(4) Saving a user map file
When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Map Edit mode.
When saving a file under a different name (using the [(6) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
The “Save as” panel will be displayed.
ECDIS
2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.

3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
• [Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
• [Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Map Edit mode ends.

5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps
You can merge the user maps as follows:
1) Make a new user map file or recall a user map file.

(For example, recall User-01 file.)
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(7) Merge] in that order.
The “Open Chart File” panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
Then, the system exits the User Map Editing mode.
User Map "USER-02" You can merge as one

user map.
User Map "USER-01"
User Map

5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps
User map files can be imported and used.

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.
And select a file format to be used at the destination.

- CSV file (WGS-84)：
Select this when importing user map data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)：
Select this when importing user map data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as
WGS-84 geodetic system data.
ECDIS
The “Open” panel will be displayed.
2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map will be displayed on the screen.
Note:
• When importing, MIN Scale of import object is set to 1/1000000 and MAX Scale is set to
1/4000000.

5.3.2.5 User Map Setting
The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The “Editor Setting” panel will be displayed.
Range of scale to display the object:

Minimum Scale / Maximum Scale
The setting of the color:

Symbol Color / Text Color / Line Color
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The thickness of the line: Five kinds
The style of the line:

Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.
The setting of a filling color in Area:

The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.
The set to size of the font:

Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts
To fix setting, click this button.
If you want to cancel the operation and close

the dialog, click this button.
To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.
Note:
The following object is always displayed in the red regardless of "Editor Setting".
・”Symbol” - ”Warning" : Symbol Color
・”Line” - "Warning Line" : Line Color
・”Area” - "Warning Area" : Line Color, Fill Color
"Warning Line" object displays a unique line irrespective of the setting of “Line Width” and
“Line Style”.

5.4 Manual Update Operation
This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user map edit process, see 5.3
“Operation Flowchart” When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the
issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that
passed since the manual update, are met (see page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically
from the chart.
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update

Start
Start Manual Update In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in
ECDIS
mode. that order.
Left-click on the
[Start] button.
Left-click on a chart
[Example]
you wish to edit.
Chart edit operation
• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects.”
• Areas
• Texts
Left-click on the
[Save] button

panel.
Enter the issue date of

a notice to mariners.
Left-click on the
Exit Manual Update mode.
[Close] button.
End

5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects
This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 “Flow of
Manual Update”).
Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. (On "Polygon" object, "Warning Area" object and Line Object
except for "Arc", it counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20,000, the "Max Point" notice occurs
and it isn't possible to do the addition of the object.
(1) Starting Manual Update mode

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in that order.
- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button
again or left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.
[Chart Edit menu]
(2) Selecting a chart to be edited

1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The “Information” panel will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel
closes.
2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.

A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the
panel closes (as shown below).
Note:
When you click the [Start] button in the editing, the following operation is done.
・When not editing, the new operation becomes beginning.
・When editing, confirmation dialog "Save Change to ****?" is displayed.
“Yes”: It shifts to the save operation.
“No”: It cancels update contents, and new operation
becomes beginning.
“Cancel”: It closes a dialog and returns to edit operation.

(3) Entering Objects
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(4) Use EBL/VRM] off
(remove a checkmark) by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a Manual Update
file.
ECDIS
(4) Saving a Manual Update

1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
In the Manual Update Editing menu
The “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Normally, conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
• [Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally,
conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
• [Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
The “Notices to Mariners” panel opens.
Enter “the issue date of a notice to mariners.”

4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.

Tips! (How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
• You can use the Object “Information” panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for
entered objects.
In the normal menu
It right-clicks a screen and it chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from Context Menu..
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.
Display example

5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting
The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.
1) In the Manual Update Editing menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The “Editor Setting” panel will be displayed.
The setting of the color:

Symbol Color (General Symbol) / Text Color /
Line Color (General Line and area)
The thickness of the line: Five kinds ECDIS
The style of the line:

Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.
The setting of a filling color in Area:

The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.
The set to size of the font:

Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts
To fix setting, click this button.

the dialog, click this button.
To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.
Note:
Editor Setting is applied to the following item.
・ Symbol Color: "General" category in "Symbol" tab. (Except for "Warning")
・ Text Color: All symbol in "Text" tab.
・ Line Color: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area"tab. (Except for "Warning
Line" and "Warning Area"; displaying red)
・ Line Width, Line Style: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except
for "Warning Line" )
・ Fill Color: All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except for "Warning Area" )
・ Transparency: All symbol of "Area" tab.
・ Font Size (Small): "Small Font" in "Text" tab.
・ Font Size (Large): "Large Font" in "Text" tab.

5.5 Entering Objects
This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Map Edit and
Manual Update modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Map
Edit mode and Manual Update mode use different symbols and lines.
●Object types available for user map edit

[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

●Object types available for manual update
[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab
ECDIS

5.5.1 Selecting Object Types
1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See “How to Select Objects” below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
Now you can enter the object you have selected.
How to Select Objects:

You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select “Light flare, default”
symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows.
1) Left-click “Buoys” twice quickly to open the items 1)
2)
behind it.
3)
2) Left-click “Barrel buoy” twice quickly to open the items
behind it. (Keep continue this operation until “-” mark
disappears.)
3) Left-click “Light flare, default”.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
• To close “Buoys”, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also select the item by left-clicking “+” and “-”
mark:
• Left-clicking “+” will open the behind items.
• Left-clicking “-” will close the behind items.

5.5.2 Entering Objects
See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when entering objects.
(1) How to enter symbols

Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel.
• Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Make Map”.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the “cursor”
column is displayed nothing.
First entry Second entry
ECDIS
Last entry
Deleting symbols [Delete]:

1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
• Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Delete Map”.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to delete.
Selected symbol
Moving symbols [Move]:

1) Left-click the [Move] button,
• Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Move Map”.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
Edit
(When you left-click the cursor.) (When you left-click the cursor.)

Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding
symbols, lines, areas and text.
Designating coordinates by entering position

inserting and adding symbols, lines and areas.
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance

inserting and adding objects, lines, areas and text.
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The “Enter Bearing/Distance” panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button
the position is designated...
Note:
• When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from
the previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous position. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that
do not require relative positions, such as symbol and text entering.

Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):
• Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Property”.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
• You can edit the latitude and longitude by entering position “LAT” and “LON”.
• You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to “Rotation”.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can enter a comment.
ECDIS
Rotated symbol by 90 degrees
Difference in symbol display between User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the
user map edit operation will not have this mark.
[Symbols used in the user map edit operation] [Symbols used in the manual update operation]
This mark will be

added.

Tips!
• You can check the current edit mode at “Cursor” column of upper part of screen.
For example, When displayed [Move map] in “Cursor” column. It is “Move mode”.
• Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)

Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 “Hiding Objects (Only during the
Manual Update Operation).”
Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:

You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or
drawing a line. When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.”
• When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.

(2) How to draw lines
Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel.
•Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Make Map”.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a
line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line.
ECDIS
Tips! (Moving the chart)

• Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart.
Move the trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.
Deleting the line [Delete]:

2) Left-click the line you want to delete.
Tips! (Moving the chart)

• When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In]
button provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target
segment easily.

Inserting the segment [Insert/Move Vertex]:
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
•Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Insert/Move VTX”.
2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Edit
(When you left-click the cursor.) (When you left-click the cursor.)
Moving the Vertex [Insert/Move Vertex]:

2) Left-click the segment you want to move the vertex.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the vertex.
Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:

1) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
•Be sure that the “cursor” column is displayed “Add VTX”.
2) Left-click the last segment of the line.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) Left-click twice quickly to stop to add the new segment.

Moving the line [Move]:
1) Left-click the [Move] button,
2) Left-click the line you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the line is moved to the new position.
Edit
ECDIS
Getting information and editing information (Line)
1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the line’s attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can enter a comment.

(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon) / (Warning Area)
How to draw the Polygon and Warning Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that
for line. So, for detailed operation, refer to (2) “How to draw lines” mentioned earlier.
Drawing area (Polygon) / (Warning Area):

1) Select Polygon or Warning Area on the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line and area is created.
(Draw sides) (Left-click twice quickly)
Getting information and edit area (line):

2) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.
(Same color but transparency differs.)

Moving the area [Move]:
1) Left-click the [Move] button.
2) Left-click the area you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the area is moved to the new position.
Edit
ECDIS
Deleting the area [Delete]:

2) Left-click the area you want to delete.
Adding a side to the area [Insert/Move Vertex]:

2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional side.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the side. Then, area is created.
Edit

(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse
1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw an ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, Left-click the [Property] button, and
Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
(Left-click the cursor.) (Ellipse)
(Draw Circle)
(Same color but Transparency differs)
0% 50%
[“Location/Attributes” panel for Circle/Ellipse]

• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
• You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
• You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

(5) How to draw areas -- Fan
1) Select Fan on the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor. Then, area is created.
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click the
inside of the area to select it.
• Case 1
ECDIS
• Case 2
[“Location/Attributes” panel for Fan]

longitude.
• You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical and angle of the fan.
• You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

(6) How to enter text (small/large font)
1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
Then, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens. You can specify the location and select attributes
by using this panel.
(When you select Small Font) (When you select Large Font)
[“Location/Attributes” panel for text]

longitude.
• You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
• You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
• You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.
3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.

The settings made in the “Location/Attributes” panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.

4) Editing entered text
Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit
(“Text,” for example).
Then, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens. By referring to step 2) above, edit the position
and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text.
ECDIS

5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual
Update Operation)
Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them
from the chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.
(1) Hiding objects

And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order..
3) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.
(2) Restoring hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again.
The objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.
(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.
Note:
The object which operated "Hiding Object" maintains a hiding condition to 90 days.
When passing more than 91 days, an object is deleted.

6
Automatic
Sailing
6-1
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route
and crossing safety contour.
When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and
ship’s position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route
is possible.
Note:
• Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.
6.1 Automatic Sailing System

6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, you need to perform the following operation for turning
the ship.
•On the operation panel, press the [TURN] key.
[Turing Operation]
Next Leg
Arrival alarm Boundary of WPT
Cross track distance (XTD)
6 Automatic Sailing 6-2

6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route
When the ship arrived at the WOL, you need to perform the following operation for turning the ship.
●Category B
•”Actual Course Change” alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL, and press the [TURN]
key on the operation panel.
●Category C
•Turns automatically when arriving at WOL.
[Turing Operation]
ECDIS
Next Leg
“Actual Course Change” alarm
is occurred 30 seconds before
arrived at WOL.
WOL
6-3 6 Automatic Sailing

6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm
●Warning and Alarm
Condition of warning/ Operating status of
Warning/alarm Remarks
alarm occurrence automatic sailing
Arrived at WPT The ship has arrived at the Can be continued. －
boundary of the set WPT.
Actual Course 30 seconds before arrived Turn becomes possible. Only TCS
Change at WOL
Off Course The difference between Can be continued. －
heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.
XTD The ship has gone be- Can be continued. －
yond the set route width.
Arrived at LAST On the sailing final leg, the Stop automatic sailing after
Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
WPT time has reached 1-5 passing through the final
“Auto” or “Hand”. Otherwise, the autopilot
minute(s) before the destination.
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
estimated arrival time at
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
the destination.
Automatic sailing Automatic sailing can’t be Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
failed continued by one of the mode of the autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”.
following cause: Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
• POSN1 error angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
• GYRO error manual for autopilot.)
• Route error
Calling back Arrived at WPT alarm or Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
navigator Route alarm does not mode of the autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”.
acknowledge for 30 Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
seconds or more. angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)
Low Speed Ship speed through water Can be continued. －
has lowered to less than
the set value.
POSN1(Data) The system position 1 has In case of DNV-classed
some errors. vessels holding NAUT- OC Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
notation, use dead- “Auto” or “Hand”. Otherwise, the autopilot
reckoning for 10 minutes, retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
and then, stop automatic see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
sailing.
POSN1 shifted The system position shifts Can be continued. －
beyond the limit.
Heading(Data) Gyrocompass has got out Should be stopped. Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
of order. “Auto” or “Hand”. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
Log(Data) Sensor for speed through Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
water has got out of order. mode of the autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”.
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
Autopilot(Data) The autopilot has got out of Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
order. mode of the autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”.
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction

6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing
Automatic sailing can be set.

Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the “AUTO Sail Setting” panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
ECDIS
a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained.
There are three settings: [Low] [Mid] [High]. An example of the difference between the own
ship cross track distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route
depending on the tracking gain setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to
the port side when the ship’s heading is 0 degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is
shown.
High
Mid
Low
Note:
• The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.

b) Drift Correction
When the ship’s speed is more than 5 knots, then control according to [None], [High], [Mid]
and [Low] setting will take drift into consideration.
Set heading Drift
Actual route that is expected
c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified
range centered on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001 NM to 0.999 NM.
Next waypoint
Dead band
Previous waypoint Set heading

(parallel to the route)
d) AUTO Stop (Only TCS category B)

Time until automatic sailing stop automatically when turning operation is not done even if
WOL is passed is set.
AUTO Stop can be set within the range from 0 min to 4 min.
This item is not displayed when using Normal type or TCS category C of A/P type.

6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation
The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.
ECDIS Autopilot
1) Select the [Route], and [Start] automatic

sailing. 2) Set the mode of the autopilot to “NAVI” for
(See the descriptions below for the the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
details of this procedure.) (Set it to “RC” for the autopilot made by
TOKIMEC.)
3) Monitor the route.
4) After ending voyage, change the mode of
the autopilot from the “NAVI” to “HAND”.
5) Select [UNLOAD] for [Route] to clear the
route from the screen.
ECDIS
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic
sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the
[TURN] key.).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents
may result.
During sailing, be sure to check own ship’s position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Note:
• For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.

6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT
To select the route, use the [Route] on the display panel.
●When using A/P that is not TCS type

Selecting Normal route (extension “.rtn”).
●When using A/P that is TCS type

Selecting TCS route (extension “.rta”).
The route where the Limit Check and Safety Check by Route Planning was done is displayed in the
left of route name, "OK>".
Normal Route
TCS route that doesn't Limit check and Safety

check by Route Planning
TCS route that does Limit check and Safety

check by Route Planning
To select the WPT, use the [To WPT] on the display panel.

6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the “Select WPT” panel opens.
Displays the [Route] file selecting on the display

panel.
Choose "To Waypoint" number displaying

alternative which was set in the [Route] file.

the panel, click [Cancel].
To fix setting, click [OK].
If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected Normal Route.
ECDIS

Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.
Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].
3) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.

Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, “Arrived at WPT” alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn.
Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.
・[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
・[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] – [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.

6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the “Select WPT” panel opens.
Displays the [Route] file

selecting on the display panel.
Choose "To Waypoint" number

displaying alternative which
was set in the [Route] file.
Please do not change the

setting as follows:
Pre Run Speed
Pre Run Time
Enter Angle
Turn Radius
Pre Run Distance
XTD MAX
To fix setting, click [OK].
If you want to cancel the operation and close the dialog,
click [Cancel].
If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected TCS route.
If the following warning is displayed, check the Limit and Safety check by Route Planning.


If there is no problem in the setting, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.
4) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.

Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:
When ”Actual Course Change” alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn. ECDIS
Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.
・[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
・[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] – [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.
6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
2) Left-click the [OK] to stop the automatic sailing.

When [Cancel] is clicked, Auto Sail is continued.

6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(3) Disconnect] in that order.
2) Left-click the [OK] to disconnect AUTO Sail.

[Cancel] is left-click when canceling “Disconnect AUTO Sail”.
Note:
When execute disconnect, the following menu changes invalidly.
・[Menu] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1)Start]
・[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] - [(3)Disconnect]
By exit to “Navigation & Planning” and start again, it returns in the validity.

7
Tools and Setting/
Serviceman Menu
7-1
7.1 File Manager
Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route
files and user chart files can also be deleted.
• In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) File Manager] in that order.
Example of Copying: Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.
1) Left-click the drop-down button “a”, then select “Route File” from the box. When route files are
selected, all files with the extensions “.rtn” and “.rta” are displayed.
2) Select “Local Disk” from box “b”. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box
“c”.
3) Left-click the drop-down button “d”, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box “c”, then
left-click the [Copy] button (“f”) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy
disk. When a file is selected from the box “e”, and the button “g” is clicked, then a file on the
floppy disk can be copied to the hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, “User Map” should be selected from the box “a”. (Files with the
extension “.uch” are displayed.) a)
b) d)
e)
c)
f)
g)
* [COPY>>] and [<<COPY] can not be selected when setting the same drive to both of box
“b” and box “d”.
* [Device is not ready.] message is displayed when selecting a [DVD Drive] or [Floppy
Disk] in box “b” or box “d” without inserting it.
* [During file operating Data Backup/Restore is not opened] message is displayed when
the following operation is done and it cannot continue while copying Voyage Log.
･ Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Backup]
･ Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Restore]
7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-2

Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box “c”, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box “c”. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so
press the [OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box “e” to delete
files in box “e” with the [Delete] button under it.
* Following file can not be deleted.
･ Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)
･ Current date Own ship Track or Voyage Log file
([The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process.]
message is displayed.)
Files that can be handled with File Manager:

Type Local DVD Floppy USB Ship
Disk Drive Disk Device LAN
Route File Normal route files (extension “.rtn”)
TCS route files (extension “.rta”) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Created with chapter 4 “Route Planning”)
User Map User chart files (extension “.uch”)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Created with chapter 5 “Chart Editing”)
ECDIS
Own Track Own ship track files (extension “.own”)
○ × × ○ ×
(Refer to chapter 3 “Own ship’s setting”)
Target Track Target track files (extension “.atr”) ○ × × ○ ×
Screen Saved screen (by manual) files (extension “.bmp”) ○
○ × × ×
Shot(MANU) (Refer to chapter 3 “Saving the Screen) (※1)
Screen Saved screen (by auto) files(extension “.bmp”)

○ × × ○ ×
Shot(AUTO)
Voyage Log Voyage log files ○ × × ○ ×
○: available, ×: not available
※1 Cannot copy from [USB device] to [Local].
Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:

When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, “Backup” will be added to
boxes “c” and “d”. By selecting “Backup”, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or
they can be copied from the backup device.
Overwriting Files:
When overwrite copying more than one file, "Over Write?" confirmation is displayed every file.
It is overwritten when clicking [OK] by the “Over Write?” screen.
It is not overwritten when clicking [Cancel] by the “Over Write?” screen.
* Following file can not be overwritten.
･ Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)
7-3 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu

7.2 System Information
The system information can be confirmed.
1) In the normal menu:

Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(2)System Information] in that order.
[System Information] panel is displayed.
[Type]: Type of system is displayed.
It displays each version

[Process Manager]
[ECDIS App]
[Chartportfolio]
[TCS]: TCS is displayed.
[Maintenance No.]:
Maintenance number of 8 digits is displayed.
2) How to close the [System Information] panel:

The panel closes when clicking [Close] button.

7.3 Operating Time
Operating time of Display, HDD1 and HDD2 can be confirmed.
1) In the normal menu:

Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(3)Operating Time] in that order.
[Operating Time] panel is displayed.
[Display]: Operating time of display
[HDD1]: Operating time of HDD1
[HDD2]: Operating time of HDD2
2) [Operating Time] panel closes when clicking [Close] button.
ECDIS

7.4 Color Test (ARCS Only)
The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(4) ARCS Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.

7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ship’s position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
●Primary position and secondary position of own ship
●Bearing and speed
●Date data source
●Time zone data source
Note:
• The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position

On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or
dead-reckoning). This is called the primary position (POSN1) or system position. A secondary position
(POSN2) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how
far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The “Sensor Connection” panel opens. ECDIS
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Position fixing system for the primary position

“POSN1” (Select from “(D)GPS1”, “(D)GPS2”and “DR”.)
Position fixing system for the secondary position

“POSN2” (Select from “(none)”, “(D)GPS1”,
“(D)GPS2”, “DR” and “DR-Reset”.)
Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display
• Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
• Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.
• (D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ship’s position.
• (D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ship’s position.
• LORAN-C: LORAN-C is used as the sensor to enter the own ship’s position
• GPS-Compass: GPS-Compass is used as the sensor to enter the own ship’s position
• DR (normally, not used): The own ship’s position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship
speed, SDME, etc.
• none: The secondary position is not used.
• DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POSN1 is used as
the reference position of DR. The GPS data obtained when “OK” in “Sensor
Connection” panel is left-clicked after “DR-Reset” is selected will be used as the
reference position.

The secondary position symbol is displayed as “◎” regardless of the scale. The track information for
the past six minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and
track can also be turned ON and OFF.
7.5.2 Bearing Setting

The “Sensor Connection” panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensor’s information
is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/
step gyro, the initial value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set]
button to fix it.
• GYRO I/F: GYRO i/F out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
• GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
• GYRO-Compass: Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
• GYRO Setting: This item uses when setting to GYRO I/F or GYRO-Compass.
In the following case, GYRO Setting becomes invalid
• When selecting GYRO(NMEA) in [Source].
• It sets [GYRO I/F] and [GYRO(NMEA)] to [Not Use] by the device setting.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the
display panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the display panel.
Selects a heading sensor

GYRO I/F
GYRO(NMEA)
GPS-Compass

7.5.3 Speed Setting
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select the log sensor. Log sensor’s information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
• GYRO I/F: GYRO I/F out put type log is used for the ship speed sensor.
• NMEA LOG: NMEA LOG out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
• GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "STW(LOG)" in the display
panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 99.9 kn.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "STW(MAN)" in the display panel.
ECDIS
Selects a ship speed sensor

LAN : GYRO I/F, NMEA LOG,
Local Port : GYRO I/F, GYRO(NMEA)
7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
• GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.

• GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
• MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually.

7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
• GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
• GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
• MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually.

7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting
Color and brilliance of Screen, Dialog, Character, and Keyboard can be changed.

Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] - [(1)Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
[Color and Brilliance Setting] panel will be displayed.
2) Selects each items and it clicks [OK] button.
Setting reflects and color and brilliance are changed.
[Apply] button: Setting can be reflected without closing [Color and Brilliance Setting Panel].
[Cancel] button: Closes [Color and Brilliance Setting] panel without reflecting setting.
[Day/Night]
Each color and brilliance can be changed collectively
by selecting the following column.
･ [Day Bright] (DAY1)
･ [Day Whiteback] (DAY2)
･ [Day Blackback] (DAY3)
･ [Dusk]
･ [Night] ECDIS
[Color]
User Dialog: Color of dialog can be changed by selecting
from 4 colors.
Character: Color of character can be changed by selecting
from 4 colors.
Target Symbol: Color of Target Symbol can be changed by
selecting from 6 colors.
Radar Video: Color of Radar Video can be changed by
selecting from 5 colors.
[Brilliance]
Character: Brilliance of character can be changed among
Level4 from Level1.
Keyboard: Brilliance of key of operation panel can be
changed among Level4 from Level0.
Target Symbol: Brilliance of Target Symbol can be
Radar Video: Brilliance of Radar Video panel can be

7.7 Setting the User Key
Register [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key functions.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Option Key Setting] in that order.
The [Option Key] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box. The selectable functions will be listed.
Left-click the function that is to be assigned to the user key.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
Selectable functions list:

Function name Function
Graphic Editor… Starts up Graphic Editor of Route Planning.
Exit from Graphic Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.
Chart Editor… Starts up User Map Editor.
Exit User Map Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.
Chart Setting… [Chart Setting] panel opens.
Ownship/Track Setting… [Own Ship Setting] panel opens.
Save My Port List… [Save my Port List] panel opens.
My Port List [My Port List] panel opens.
Change Active Panel (ARCS only) Boundary of the chart is displayed.
Load Low Resolution(ARCS only) Changes to low resolution.
Logbook [Logbook] panel opens.
Print Display… [Print] panel opens.
Save Screen Saves a screen.
Save Chart Setting [Save Chart Setting] panel opens.
Chart Setting List [Chart Setting List] panel opens.
Display Base Temporarily Changes SENC information level to “Base” temporarily.
(S-57/C-MAP only) Returns to previous level when pushing allocated user
key again.
Also, returns to previous level when moving a cursor to
menu bar or display panel and so on, too.

7.8 Setting Date/Time
When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00,
and UTC and ship’s local mean time (LMT) are the same.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
The “Date/Time” panel opens.
2) It chooses each clause eyes and it inputs value to the value entrybox..
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.
ECDIS
The following items can be set:
a) LMT Date/LMT Time

Set the date/time when “MANUAL” has been selected in the date/time data source setting.
For details, see 7.5.4 “Date Data Source Setting”.
• Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Time Zone
Set the time difference when “MANUAL” has been selected in the time zone data source
setting. For details, see 7.5.5 “Time Zone Data Source Setting”.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=“+”, W=“-”)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
LMT Time zone

3) [UTC/LMT] and [Display style] can be selected from the following item.
c) UTC/LMT
It does UTC/LMT change in the display time of the display panel.
It synchronizes with the time difference button display on the display panel.
d) Display Style
Date and time display on the display panel changes to the set format.
Y = Year, M = Month, D = Day
Note:
• When an item other than “MANUAL” has been set in the date/time data source setting,
date/time setting procedure is not necessary.
7.9 Clear Voyage Distance

Voyage Distance can be cleared by this function.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The “Question” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.
Voyage Distance isn't cleared when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7.10 Setting the Alarm Options
You can set the various alarm options.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
The “Alarm List Setting” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry,
enter the value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
ECDIS
a) Limit
• Difference between POSN1 and POSN2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POSN1 and POSN2 have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
• Shift of POSN1
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of
the ship is larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something
influences your ship’s position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the
chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
• Off Course
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more
than the preset angle.
• Early Course Change Indication
It is displayed only when setting TCS type in Auto Pilot.
ECC indication popup occurs when the time to the WOL arrival reaches a set value when
making setting valid.
• Arrival Last WPT
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is
reduced to the amount you have set.

• Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
• Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Vector Length unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
• Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 359.9 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.27.3 “Danger Detection Vector and Sector”.
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Sector Radius unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
• Low Speed Alarm
It is displayed only when setting TCS TOKIMEC category B in Auto Pilot.
When making valid, the alarm occurs when through-the-water speed declines from the set
value.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart
contacts a danger detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
• Traffic separation zone
• Traffic crossing
• Traffic roundabout
• Traffic precautionary
• Two Way traffic
• Deeper water route
• Recommended traffic lane
• Inshore traffic zone
• Fairway
• Restricted area
• Caution area
• Offshore production area
• Military practice area
• Seaplane landing area
• Submarine transit area
• Ice area
• Channel
• Fishing ground
• Fishing prohibited
• Pipeline area
• Cable area
• Anchorage area
• Anchorage prohibited
• Spoil ground
• Dumping ground
• Dredge area
• Cargo transshipment area
• Incineration area
• Specially protected area

7.11 Radar Process Setting
It sets [Video Latitude], [Video Noise Rejection], [Auto DR Control], [Process Switch], [2cd Process Mode],
[Process Switch Range], [First Target Detection] about the radar.

Select [MENU] - [Main] - [Setting] - [Radar Process Setting…] in the order.
Radar Process Setting screen is displayed.
• Video Latitude:
Video Latitude can be set by selecting it from [Normal], [Wide], [Narrow], [Super Wide].
• Video Noise Rejection:
The level of Video Noise Rejection can be set by choosing it from [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2].
• Auto DR Control:
ON/OFF of Auto DR Control can be changed.
• Process Switch:
Process Switch can be set to [Distance Fix] or [Auto].
• 2nd Process Mode:
2nd Process Mode can be set by selecting it from [Off], [PROC1], [PROC2], [PROC3],
[PROC4], [PROC5].
ECDIS
• Process Switch Range:
Process Range can be changed every 0.1 at up or down of the spin button.
• First Target Detection:
ON/OFF of First Target Detection can be changed.
This setting becomes invalid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC1] or [PROC2].
This setting becomes valid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC3], [PROC4], [PROC5].
7.12 Language
The language to display can be selected from Japanese or English.
1) In case of making Japanese display in the normal menu.

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] – [Language] – [Japanese] in that order.
The display language becomes Japanese.
2) In case of making English display in the normal menu.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] – [Language] – [English] in that order.
The display language becomes English
* In English OS, [Language] in [MENU] - [Main] isn't displayed..

7.13 Code Input
By inputting a regulated code on “Code Input” panel, the enhanced menu is displayed. As other functions,
"Navigation and Planning" can be ended.

Select [(7) Main] - [(5) Code Input] in that order.
The [Code Input] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input the regulated code to the input column, and push [OK] button. Then, “Code Input” panel is
closed, and operation corresponding to a regulated code is done. When inputting the
deregulated code, “Code Input” panel is closed with nothing done.
* A typing in character is displayed with "*"
Regulated code and the operation

Input Code Function
0 “Serviceman” menu (for engineer) is displayed on Menu Title Bar.
(Original menu is disappeared on this operation. To display original menu, select
[Serviceman]-[Exit Serviceman Menu].)
* Please do not operate the serviceman menu excluding JRC serviceman.
The device might not work correctly when the setting is changed.
3) To close “Code Input” panel, select “Cancel” button.

7.14 Own ship’s Parameter Setting
Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.

After changing the setting, execute to exit “Navigation & Planning”.
Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.
7.14.1 Ship’s Parameter

This function sets the parameter of a ship necessary for operating ECDIS.
ECDIS
After “Serviceman” menu is displayed by “Code Input” panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(4) Ship’s Parameter] in that order.
The [Ship’s Parameter] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.
3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then, Information message is displayed.
4) Exit to “Navigation & Planning” and start again.

7.14.2 CCRP Setting
This function sets the parameter of the position of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) and the
position of each sensor.

After “Serviceman” menu is displayed by “Code Input” panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(3) Installation]-[(2) CCRP Setting…] in that order.
The [CCRP Setting] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.
GPS / Radar Antenna:

Input the position according
to the installed environment,
and change to ON the check
box in using the sensor.
CCRP:
Set the position of CCRP.
Set the radio button of the
item used effectively though
four places can be set.
3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then,

Information message is displayed.
4) Exit to “Navigation & Planning” and start again.

7.15 Line Monitor
Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(1) Line Monitor] in that order.

The “Line Monitor” panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be
displayed in the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected
external device will be displayed in the output data display box in real time. Left-click on the
[Stop] button to stop information from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear
the currently displayed information. If there is no inputting/outputting of data between the
ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will be displayed in the data display box.
ECDIS

7.16 Adjust
This function adjusts [Bearing], [Range] and [Antenna height].
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(2) Adjust] in that order.

The “Adjust” panel will be displayed.
2) Input or select a value to each item.
Bearing Adjustment:
The value is input and bearing is
adjusted.
Range Adjustment:
The value is input and range is
adjusted.
Antenna Height:
Selects from the drop-down list
and antenna height is adjusted.
3) After setting all items, push the [Close] button.
7.17 Installation Information

This function sets the installation information.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(1) Installation Information] in that order.
The “Installation Information” panel will be displayed.
2) Input a value to each column.
Date: Input an installed date.
Name:
Input an administrator name.
Company:
Input the company name.
3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.


7.18 TCS Maintenance
This function sets [Reach Offset], [Safety / Limit Check] setting and [Time / Distance to WPT] setting
about the TCS.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(5) TCS Maintenance] in that order.

The “TCS Maintenance” panel will be displayed.
2) Input or select setting to each item.
Reach Offset:
Input a reach offset of TCS.
Safety / Limit Check:

On: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
checked.
Off: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
not checked.
ECDIS
Time / Distance to WPT

From center point of WOL:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between own ship and center
point of WOL.
From cross point of WOL and heading:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between center point of heading
of own ship and WOL.
3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.


7.19 Radar Initial Setup
This function sets [Echo Noise Level] of [Signal Processing], [MBS Level] and [MBS Area] about the
radar.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(5) TCS Maintenance] in that order.

The “TCS Maintenance” panel will be displayed.
2) Input a value to each column.
• Signal Processing: Setting the echo noise level of Signal Processing.
• MBS: Setting the level and area of Main Bang Suppression.
Echo Noise Level:
Echo Noise Level can be set between
from 0 to 255.
Setting Mode:
On/Off of Setting Mode can be changed.
MBS Level:
MBS Level can be set between from 0 to
255.
MBS Area:
MBS area can be set between from 0 to
255.
3) Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.

It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.

7.20 Data Backup/Restore
This function is backup and restore of setting data.
Data can be backed up to the following devices.

●Backup Drive(DVD Drive)
●Floppy Disk
●USB Device
7.20.1 How to backup the data

It explains the data backup procedure as follows.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data Backup/Restore] - [(1) Backup] in that order.
The “Data Backup/Restore” panel will be displayed.
2) Select destination device from drop-down button “a”.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box “b”, and left-click the [COPY>>] button (“c”) to
start backup.
Left-click [Select All] button (“d”) when you select all files.
5) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box “e”.
a) ECDIS
f)
g)
b)
c)
e)
d)
* [Type (“f”)] and [Source drive (“g”)] can’t be changed.

7.20.2 How to restore the data
It explains the data restore procedure as follows.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data Backup/Restore] - [(2) Restore] in that order.
The “Data Backup/Restore” panel will be displayed.
2) Select source device from drop-down button “a”.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box “b”, and left-click the [<<COPY] button (“c”) to
start restore.
Left-click [Select All] button (“d”) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box “e”.
e)
a)
f)
b)
e) c)
d)
* [Type (“f”)] and [Destination drive (“g”)] can’t be changed.

8
Playback
8-1
In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for
Navigation & Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning
screen except for the [(9) Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some
submenus you cannot use in the Playback.
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback

(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the “ ” in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the “Staring Date/Time”
panel is displayed.
Note:
• The mode selected last ([Navigation & Planning] in case of ECDIS, [Conning Display] in case
of Conning Display) will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.
8 Playback 8-2
Display panels for playback operation
[For S-57/C-MAP] [For ARCS]
ECDIS
8-3 8 Playback
Special menu for playback:
In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback, [(8)
Playback] is used, instead.
Displays the “Starting Date/Time” panel.
Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.

Turns ON/OFF the “Playback” panel.
Table 9 Playback Menu Tree

(1) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9
(2) TT2 3.3.9
(3) AIS 3.3.9
(4) All 3.3.9
(6) All List 3.3.9
(7) Select List 3.3.9
(2) Route (0) Setting… 4.1.1
(4) Ownship/Track (0) Setting… 3.27
(5) User Map (1) Select User Map 3.13
(2) Unselect User Map 3.13
(6) Chart (2) Off Center (1) Enter Position… 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.1
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List… 3.8.1
(2) My Port List… 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting… 3.28.3
(4) Chart Setting List… 3.28.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart… 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates… 3.30
(3) Chart Abbreviation… 3.29
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary… 3.10.9
(2) Adjust Datum Offset… 3.10.10
(3) Datum Transformation… 3.10.10
(7) Main (1) EBL Maneuver/
3.19
Remove EBL Maneuver
(2) Cross Bearing 3.20
(5) Print 3.35
(2) File Manager 7.1
8 Playback 8-4
Table 9 Playback Menu Tree -- Continued
(7) Main (3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(8) Playback (1) Starting Date/Time 8.2
(2) Start 8.2
(3) Pause 8.2
(4) Stop 8.2
(5) Playback Panel 8.2
(0) Exit 8.1
(2) Exiting the Playback

1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation &
Planning screen.
ECDIS
8-5 8 Playback
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data
(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the “Starting Date/Time” panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)
Logging data drop-down list*1
Date and time of recording end

Date and time of recording start
Selection of date and time to be played

2
back*
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)
*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were
recorded are displayed.
2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK]
button.
(2) Displaying the Playback Panel

1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the “Playback panel” panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is
ON, the panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button
[Start] Button
[Stop] Button
[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the
“Start Date/Time” panel as shown above.
[Playback Speed Select] Button

Left-click this drop-down list button and then
select the playback speed you want by left-clicking it.
• Even if the “Playback Panel” panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from
the menu.
8 Playback 8-6
(3) Start and stop of playback
1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the “Playback Panel”.
Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging
data.
Playback Statues:
• Stop:
• During playback:
• When paused:
2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.

• To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again.
ECDIS
8-7 8 Playback
9
Reference
9-1
9.1 Alarm Function
(1) No Alarm
Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3
No Alarm No Alarm Normal State Green Silent No Alarm
(2) System Alarm

Alarm
Colour*3
No.1 POSN 1(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm POSN1 (primary) is defective or Position measuring
Position communication line is cut. instrument is
Data Alarm connected
POSN1 not fix Alarm Red System Alarm POSN1 is not fixed.
(including DR).
POSN1(NON-WGS84) Alarm Red System Alarm Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
No.2 POSN 2(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm POSN2 (secondary) is defective or Position measuring
Position communication line is cut. instrument is
Data Alarm connected
POSN2 not fix Alarm Red System Alarm POSN2 is not fixed.
(including DR).
POSN2(NON-WGS84) Alarm Red System Alarm Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
No.1 POSN1 shifted Alarm Red System Alarm The shift amount of the primary User setting
Position Shift position exceeds the limit being set.
Alarm
Position Position difference Alarm Red System Alarm The difference between the primary User setting.
Difference exceed and second positions exceeds the Position measuring
Alarm limit being set. instrument is
connected to
POSN2
(including DR).
Radar Data PROC(AZI) Alarm Red System Alarm Rotation signal (BP) is out of During radar
Alarm specifications. display
PROC(HL) Alarm Red System Alarm Rotation signal (BZ) is out of
specifications.
PROC(Trigger) Alarm Red System Alarm Trigger signal is out of specifications
or signal line is cut.
PROC(Video) Alarm Red System Alarm Video signal is out of specifications.
RIB(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the radar interface
board.
PROC(Reverse) Alarm Red System Alarm Error by reverse-rotation in the signal
processing part.
PROC(INT) Alarm Red System Alarm Error in interrupting of stun in the
signal processing part.
ASIC1 to Radar Alarm Red System Alarm Error in interrupting from ASIC1 to
radar DSP
Target Track TT(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Target Track is defective or signal During TT
Data Alarm line is cut. display
SRB Data SRB(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the serial relay Always
Alarm board
GYRO Data Gyro I/F(Gyro) Alarm Red System Alarm Gyro is defective. Gyro is
Alarm connected.
Heading(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the heading data of
gyro interface or its line is cut.
LOG Data Gyro I/F(Log) Alarm Red System Alarm Log is defective. Log is
Alarm Log(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the log data of log connected.
interface or its line is cut.
Autopilot Autopilot(DATA) Alarm Red System Alarm Autopilot is defective or Autopilot is
Data Alarm communication line is cut. connected.
Hardware Fan(CPU) Alarm Red System Alarm CPU fan is defective. Always
Alarm CPU High Temperature Alarm Red System Alarm CPU temperature is rising.
Fan(Main PWR) Alarm Red System Alarm Main power supply fan is defective.
Fan(ATX PWR) Alarm Red System Alarm ATX power supply fan is defective.
Fan(LCD) Alarm Red System Alarm LCD fan is defective.
Disk1 Error Alarm Red System Alarm Disk1 is defective.
Disk2 Error Alarm Red System Alarm Disk2 is defective.
AC offline Alarm Red System Alarm AC power is offline.
9 Reference 9-2
(3) Nav. Alarm
Alarm
Colour*3
Safety Crossing Safety Contour Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Safety Contour within Vector = ON
contour Alarm - Mid set time. (User setting)
Alarm
Dangerous Approaching Obstruction Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching obstruction Sector=ON
Alarm Alarm - Mid (User setting)
Approaching Under Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching under-water rock
water rock Alarm - Mid
Approaching Wreck Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching wreck
Alarm - Mid
Dangerous Symbol Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching wreck
Alarm - Mid
Approaching Buoy/Light Alarm Red Navigation Approaching Buoy/Light
Alarm - Mid
Route Arrived at WPT Alarm Red Navigation Arrived at the WPT. During Normal
Monitoring Alarm - Mid route navigation
Alarm Actual course change Alarm Red Navigation [A] Necessary to change in the During TCS route
Alarm - Mid course. (It occurs before by 30 navigation
seconds which arrive at WOL.)
Off Course Alarm Red Navigation The difference between the course During route
Alarm - Mid and bearing exceeds the limit. navigation and
XTD Alarm Red Navigation The amount of the cross track error Alarm Setting =
Alarm - Mid exceeds the limit. ON
(User setting)
Arrived at LAST WPT Alarm Red Navigation Arrived at the last WPT on the sailing
Alarm - Mid final leg.
Automatic sailing failed Alarm Red Navigation Automatic sailing cannot be During automatic
Alarm - Mid continued. sailing
By one of the following causes:
• POSN1 error
• GYRO error
• Route error
Call-back navigator Alarm Red Navigation [A] Outputs a callback navigator
Alarm - High alarm.
By one of the following causes:
• ARR alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
• Route alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
Target Alarm CPA/TCPA Alarm Red Navigation [AIS/TT] CPA(Closet Point of AIS/TT display =
Alarm - Low Approach) or TCPA(Time to CPA) ON
Lost Alarm Red Navigation [AIS/TT] Target is lost.
Alarm - Low
LAT. Limit LAT. Limit Over Alarm Red Navigation Limit Over Latitude on own ship. Always ECDIS
Over Alarm Alarm - Mid 83 00.000'N
83 00.000’S
Anchor Dragging anchor Alarm Red Navigation Crossing anchor circle Anchor
Alarm Alarm - Mid circle=ON
Timer Alarm Timer Alarm Red Navigation Time out Timer=ON

Alarm - Low (User setting)
Chart Alarm Loaded different datum Alarm Red Navigation Different datum chart is loaded. Always
chart Alarm - Low
Loaded unknown datum Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] Unknown datum chart is Chat type =
chart Alarm - Low loaded. ARCS
Chart image is Zoom out Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] Low-resolution chart is
Alarm - Low displayed.
ARCS Alarm Security failed Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS See 10.2.1
Alarm - Low security occurred. “Alarm Informa-
tion of ARCS
Not up to date Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS Chart”.
Alarm - Low updated.
Area Alarm Traffic separation zone Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone Vector=ON
Alarm - Mid within set time. (User setting)
Traffic Crossing Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within Alarm item=ON
Alarm - Mid set time. (User setting)
Traffic roundabout Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Traffic precautionary Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary
Two way traffic Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within
Alarm - Mid set time.
9-3 9 Reference
(3) Nav. Alarm - Continued
Alarm
Colour*3
Area Alarm Deeper water route Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Deeper Water Route Vector=ON
Alarm - Mid within set time. (User setting)
Recommended traffic Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Recommended Traffic Alarm item=ON
lane Alarm - Mid Lane within set time. (User setting)
Inshore traffic zone Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone
Fairway Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
Alarm - Mid
Restricted area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Restricted Area within
Caution area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Caution Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Offshore production Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Shore Production Area
area Alarm - Mid within set time.
Military practice area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Military Practice Area
Seaplane landing area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area
Submarine transit area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Submarine transit Area
Ice area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
Alarm - Mid
Channel Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Channel within set time.
Alarm - Mid
Fishing ground Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Fishing Ground within
Fishing prohibited Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited
Pipeline area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Cable area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Cable Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Anchorage area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Anchorage Area within
Anchorage prohibited Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited
Spoil ground Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Dumping ground Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dumping Ground within
Dredge area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dredge Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Cargo transshipment Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment
area Alarm - Mid Area within set
Incineration area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Incineration Area within
Specially protected area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Specially Protected
Alarm - Mid Areas within set time.
Dangerous line Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dangerous Line within
Dangerous Area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dangerous Area within
(4) INFO/Warning
Alarm
Colour*3
Information Set Gyro Invalid Blue Operation Miss Setting up is not completed. Always
Information By one of the following causes:
POSN1 not select Invalid Blue Setting Alarm • Initial course for step/synchronize
Information gyro is not set.
Safety contour not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm • POSN1 is unsetting.
Information • Safety contour value is not set
(default value unchanged).
Shallow contour not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm
• Shallow contour value is not set
Information
(default value unchanged).
Deep contour not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm • Deep contour value is not set
Information (default value unchanged).
Safety depth not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm • Safety depth value is not set
Information (default value unchanged).
9 Reference 9-4
(5) INFO/Warning - continued
Alarm
Colour*3
Information AIS Max Target Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed AIS/TT display =
maximum number. ON
AIS 95% Capacity Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed to
95% or more of maximum number.
AIS ACT Max Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed maximum number.
AIS ACT 95% Capacity Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed to 95% or more of
maximum number.
Warning POSN1(HDOP) Warning Yellow Silent HDOP increase in primary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
POSN2(HDOP) Warning Yellow Silent HDOP increase in secondary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
Loading Non-HO chart. Warning Yellow Silent [ENC]Selecting Chart that is not
Official. (ex. C-MAP)
Over scale. Warning Yellow Silent [ENC]Two expansion displays were
multiplied from the reduced scale of
the chart when the ship moves to
another chart.
Larger scale available. Warning Yellow Silent Larger scale available.
ENC data are available. Warning Yellow Silent ENC data are available.
Position shift. Warning Yellow Silent Ship’s position is shifted by Offset
function.
Chart shift. Warning Yellow Silent [ARCS]Chart shift.
Chart shift to WGS84. Warning Yellow Silent [ARCS] Selecting Chart that is not
datum on WGS84.
POSN1 not differential. Warning Yellow Silent The quality indicator of POSN1 is
things except “1".
POSN2 not differential. Warning Yellow Silent The quality indicator of POSN2 is
things except “1".
Fix View. Warning Yellow Silent [ENC]Selecting Fix View
No ENC available Warning Yellow Silent [ENC] The chart at the ship position
is No ENC
Customized display Warning Yellow Silent At lease I Standard Category
checkbox in S57/C-MAP
Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 is not checked
(6) Operation Miss
Alarm
Colour*3
ECDIS
Operation Invalid Data Operation Miss Blue Operation Miss The operation for which data was
Miss necessary was done with there no
position data.
No Object Operation Miss None Operation Miss The spot without the object was
selected.
Echo OFF Operation Miss None Operation Miss Echo is off because offset limit of
Radar echo was over.
Not Allowed Operation Miss None Operation Miss Invalid operation
Max Point Operation Miss None Operation Miss Entered information beyond the
specification
Note:
• Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.
9-5 9 Reference
Remarks:
*1: Category
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)

When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description
of the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the
Alarm button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking alarm
stops and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the “Alarm
List” panel. The “Alarm List” panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.
Alarm button [Alarm List] button
Alarm display
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]
Button/Panel
Alarm Icon on Status Icon on Log
/Buzzer Alarm button Buzzer
display of “Alarm List” panel of “Alarm List” Panel
Attribution
Not acknowledged Red blinking Stay red Red blinking Red blinking Generated
Alarm
Acknowledged Not indicate Stay red Stay red Stay red Silent
Invalid Information Blue blinking Stay blue Stay blue Stay blue Generated
Information with low integrity/ Warning Not indicate Stay yellow Stay yellow Stay yellow Silent
Normal State Stay green Stay green - - Silent
*3: An alarm shown in the “Alarm List” panel.

*4: Audible sound from the dedicated keyboard. The sounding pattern varies with the type of alarm.
Volume of the alarm is changeable every type. ([(7)Main] – [(0)Setting] – [(0) Buzzer Setting])
*5: [A]: Alarm used for TCS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*6: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.
9 Reference 9-6
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information
9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to
display these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a
malfunction of ECDIS. JRC’s ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and
display such alarm information.
Alarm Information of ARCS chart

Timing and place of
No. Error message Measures to take
displaying error message
1 ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the Displayed in Chart Portfolio
have been altered. You may be in breach authorized license (Chart Permit). Your when Navigation & Planning is
of the licensing arrangements that relate license has been falsified, so it is invalid. started, when ARCS Informa-
to the use of the chart. tion of User Maintenance
License is invalid. Please contact your Menu is checked, and when
ARCS agent/ distributor to correct this the chart is imported.
error.
2 ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit Register Chart Permit again. Chart Displayed in Chart Portfolio
corrupted. Please reload original media. Permit is in abnormal state. If the when the chart is imported
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).
3 ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update Import data from the latest chart CD and Displayed in Chart Portfolio
information relates to a newer version of update CD. The chart version of the when the chart is imported
the chart. Please load the chart CD that update CD does not match the imported
contain Chart# with an issue date of chart version.
RCID.
4 ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data Import data from the latest chart CD and Displayed in Chart Portfolio
already incorporates this update informa- update CD. The data on the current when the chart is imported
tion. Please load the latest update CD. update CD is already imported.
5 ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired - Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in Chart Portfolio
updating is not permitted. Please contact Your license has already expired, so when the chart is imported
your agent to re-new license. updating is not permitted. (only for Navigator Service
Edition)
6 ARCS08 Warning - License expired in Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
less than one month. Please contact your Your license (Chart Permit) will expire in the chart is displayed (only for ECDIS
ARCS agent for a license renewal. less than a month. Navigator Service Edition)
7 ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
expired. The displayed chart may not be One month has not passed yet since the the chart is displayed (only for
up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange expiry date of your license (Chart Permit). Navigator Service Edition)
for a license renewal.
8 ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired. Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
ARCS charts can not be displayed. One month or more has passed since the the chart is displayed (only for
Contact your ARCS agent for a license expiry date of your license (Chart Permit). Navigator Service Edition)
renewal. The chart is not displayed.
9 ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded Import the latest license and chart CD. Displayed in the panel when
version of this chart is too old to be used The chart encryption version number does the chart is displayed (only for
with the license. Please load a more not match the encryption version number Navigator Service Edition)
recent version of the chart. Chart version of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#. is not displayed.
9-7 9 Reference
Alarm Information of ARCS chart (continued)
Timing and place of
displaying error message
10 ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
old to be used with this version of the The chart encryption version number does the chart is displayed (only for
chart. Please contact your agent to obtain not match the encryption version number Navigator Service Edition)
a new license. of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.
11 Larger Scale available More detailed charts than the currently Displayed in the message area
displayed chart can be displayed. when the chart is displayed
Larger-scale charts than the currently
displayed chart exist.
12 Chart Shift Note that the currently displayed chart Displayed in the message area
position is shifted. The display position when the chart is displayed
of the current chart is shifted in
accordance with user-defined setting.
13 Chart Shift To WGS84 Note that the currently displayed chart Displayed in the message area
position is shifted. The displayed chart is when the chart is displayed
not of the WGS-84 geodetic system, but it
is displayed in accordance with WGS-84
while the offset value of chart data is used
as reference.
14 WGS84 position cannot be related Note that the geodetic system of the Displayed in the message area
accurately to chart Chart#. currently displayed chart does not when the chart is displayed
conform to WGS-84. An offset value is
not set to WGS-84, so the chart cannot be
shifted to WGS-84.
15 Loading different datum chart Note that the geodetic system of the Displayed in the message area
currently displayed chart is not WGS-84. when the chart is displayed
A chart of a non-WGS-84 geodetic system
is displayed.
16 Loaded unknown datum chart Note that the currently displayed chart is Displayed in the message area
of an unknown geodetic system. A chart when the chart is displayed
whose geodetic system is not set in chart
data is displayed.
17 PIN Error Check for the Personal Identification Displayed in the panel when a
Number (PIN). The entered PIN is not PIN is entered at start of
correct. Navigation & Planning
18 Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit Register Chart Permit again. Chart Displayed in Chart Portfolio
corrupted. Please reload original media. Permit is in abnormal state. If the when the chart is imported
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).
Note 1 : “#” in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.

Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is
provided for the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service
only.
9 Reference 9-8
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart
This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is
displayed on ECDIS.

1 C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed. License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart
Portfolio.
2 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute
contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal. after it is started. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license
renewal.
3 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than
DD/MM/YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent 2 months. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
for a license renewal.
4 C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found. C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press
[POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then, press [POWER]
again to start the equipment.
5 C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the
software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
6 C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the
software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
ECDIS
9-9 9 Reference
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart
This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart
Portfolio while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.
When Base CD is used

No. Error message Cause Procedure
1 error(0x00000001) A chart defined in the catalog This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File not found file on the chart CD is not chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
2 error(0x00000002) A catalog file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File Length contains a data length error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
3 error(0x00000003) The chart CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File extention extension error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
4 error(0x00000004) A chart file is found on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File count chart CD. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
5 error(0x00000005) Specified data is not found on This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Data not found the chart CD. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
error: Data error data error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
7 error(0x00000007) A chart file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: CRC contains a CRC value error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
8 error(0x00000008) The chart CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Exchange exchange target data error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
error: Data structure structure error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
9 Reference 9-10
When Base CD is used (continued)
10 error(0x0000000A) The attribute value of an This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Attribute object defined in a chart file chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
on the chart CD is incorrect. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
11 error(0x0000000B) Internal memory address Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction error (instruction section)
Address
12 error(0x0000000C) Internal memory offset error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction offset (instruction section)
13 error(0x0000000D) Memory allocation error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule Memory rule section)
14 error(0x0000000E) Data acquisition error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule rule section)
Information
15 error(0x0000000F) Chart-object attribute Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Attribute acquisition error
Information
16 error(0x00000010) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Enc File write
17 error(0x00000011) Chart-object information Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Object Class get acquisition error
18 error(0x00000012) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Directory create
19 error(0x00000013) A chart object on the chart This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Topology CD contains a topology error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
20 error(0x00000014) A chart area object on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Area Object Link chart CD contains a link error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
21 error(0x00000015) A line object on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Line Object Link contains a link error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
ECDIS
22 error(0x00000016) A chart object on the chart This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Object outside CD is beyond the boundary. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
9-11 9 Reference
When Update CD is used
1 error(0x00000001) Memory allocation error Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Memory get
2 error(0x00000002) Chart index acquisition error An index needs to be created again. Index creation may
error: Index get take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
3 error(0x00000003) SENC file is not found. An index needs to be created again. Index creation may
error: File not found take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
4 error(0x00000004) A chart file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: CRC contains a CRC value error. chart cannot be updated.
5 error(0x00000005) The update CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Exchange exchange target data error. chart cannot be updated.
6 error(0x00000006) The update CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data structure structure error. chart cannot be updated.
7 error(0x00000007) A chart defined in a catalog This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data not found file on the update CD is not chart cannot be updated.
found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
8 error(0x00000008) A SENC chart object name is This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object not found not found. chart cannot be updated.
9 error(0x00000009) SENC chart-file size Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Chart Cell size acquisition error
10 error(0x0000000A) SENC chart file acquisition Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Chart Cell data error
11 error(0x0000000B) SENC warning-file size Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Warning Cell size acquisition error
12 error(0x0000000C) SENC warning file Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Warning Cell data acquisition error
13 error(0x0000000D) The update CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Sequential update number sequence chart cannot be updated.
number error error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
9 Reference 9-12
When Update CD is used (continued)
14 error(0x0000000E) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object index update CD contains an object chart cannot be updated.
index error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
15 error(0x0000000F) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Attribute update CD contains an chart cannot be updated.
information attribute information error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
16 error(0x00000010) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Attribute update CD contains an chart cannot be updated.
attribute value error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
17 error(0x00000011) Internal memory address Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction error (instruction section)
Address
18 error(0x00000012) Internal memory offset error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction Offset (instruction section)
19 error(0x00000013) Memory allocation error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule Memory rule section)
20 error(0x00000014) Data acquisition error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule rule section)
Information
21 error(0x00000015) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Enc File write
22 error(0x00000016) Chart-object information Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Object Class get acquisition error
23 error(0x00000017) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data structure data structure error. chart cannot be updated.
error: FFPC delete data structure error (FFPC chart cannot be updated.
field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
ECDIS
error: FFPC edit data structure error (FFPC chart cannot be updated.
field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
26 error(0x0000001A) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FSPC delete data structure error (FSPC chart cannot be updated.
9-13 9 Reference
27 error(0x0000001B) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FSPC edit data structure error (FSPC chart cannot be updated.
28 error(0x0000001C) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: VRPC delete data structure error (VRPC chart cannot be updated.
29 error(0x0000001D) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: VRPC edit data structure error (VRPC chart cannot be updated.
30 error(0x0000001E) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: SGCC delete data structure error (SGCC chart cannot be updated.
31 error(0x0000001F) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: SGCC edit data structure error (SGCC chart cannot be updated.
error: Coordinate Type data structure error chart cannot be updated.
(coordinate type). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
33 error(0x00000021) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Directory create
34 error(0x00000022) A chart object on the update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Topology CD contains a topology error. chart cannot be updated.
35 error(0x00000023) A chart area object on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
Area Object Link update CD contains a link chart cannot be updated.
error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
36 error(0x00000024) A chart line object on the This error is not fatal.

error: Line Object Link update CD contains a link Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
error. again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
9 Reference 9-14
37 error(0x00000025) A chart object on the update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object outside CD is beyond the boundary. chart cannot be updated.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
error: point chart point object error. chart cannot be updated.
39 error(0x00000027) Chart CD Edition number This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Edition number error chart cannot be updated.
ECDIS
9-15 9 Reference
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic
No.
1
System
Abbreviation
WGS-72
Description
World Geodetic System 1972
No.
56
Abbreviation
KAN Kandawala
Description
2 WGS-84 World Geodetic System 1984 57 KEG Kerguelen Island 1949

3 EUR European 1950 58 KEA Kertau 1948
4 ADI Adindan 59 KUS Kusaie Astro 1951
5 AFG Afgooye 60 LCF L. C. 5 Astro 1961
6 AIN Ain el Abd 1970 61 LEH Leigon
7 ANO Anna 1 Astro 1965 62 LIB Liberia 1964
8 AIA Antigua Island Astro 1943 63 LUZ Luzon
9 ARF Arc 1950 64 MIK Mahe 1971
10 ARS Arc 1960 65 MAS Massawa
11 ASC Ascension Island 1958 66 MER Merchich
12 ATF Astro beacon "E" 1945 67 MID Midway Astro 1961
13 SHB Astro DOS 71/4 68 MIN Minna
14 TRN Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961 69 ASM Montserrat Island Astro 1958
15 ASQ Astronomical Station 1952 70 MPO M'Poraloko
16 AUA Australian Geodetic 1966 71 NAH Nahrwan
17 AUG Australian Geodetic 1984 72 NAP Naparima, BWI
18 PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse 73 NAS North American 1927
19 IBE Bellevue (IGN) 74 NAR North American 1983
20 BER Bermuda 1957 75 FLO Observatorio Meteorologico 1939
21 BID Bissau 76 OEG Old Egyptian 1907
22 BOO Bogota Observatory 77 OHA Old Hawaiian
23 BUR Bukit Rimpah 78 FAH Oman
24 CAZ Camp Area Astro 79 OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
25 CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969 1936
26 CAO Canton Astro 1966 80 PLN Pico de las Nieves
27 CAP Cape 81 PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967
28 CAC Cape Canaveral 82 PTB Point 58
29 CGE Carthage 83 PTN Pointe Noire 1948
30 CHI Chatam Island Astro 1971 84 POS Porto Santo 1936
31 CHU Chua Astro 85 PRP Provisional South American 1956
32 COA Corrego Alegre 86 HIT Provisional South Chilean 1963
33 DAL Dabola (also known as Hito XVIII 1963)
34 BAT Djakarta (Batavia) 87 PUR Puerto Rico
35 GIZ DOS 1968 88 QAT Qatar national
36 EAS Easter Island 1967 89 QUO Qornoq
37 EUS European 1979 90 REU Reunion
37 FOT Fort Thomas 1955 91 MOD Rome 1940
39 GAA Gan 1970 92 SAE Santo (DOS) 1965
40 GEO Geodetic Datum 1949 93 SAO Sao Braz
41 GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948 94 SAP Sapper Hill 1943
42 GUA Guam 1963 95 SCK Schwarzeck
43 GSE Gunung Segara 96 SGM Selvagem Grande 1938
44 DOB GUX 1 Astro 97 SAN South American 1969
45 HEN Herat North 98 SOA South Asia
46 HJO Hjorsey 1955 99 TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925
47 HKD Hong Kong 1963 100 TIL Timbalai 1948
48 HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan 101 TOY Tokyo
49 IND Indian Indian 1954 102 TDC Tristan Astro 1968
50 INF Indian 1975 103 MVS Viti Levu 1916
51 INH Ireland 1965 104 ENW Wake-Eniwetok 1960
52 TRL ISTS 061 105 WAK Wake Island Astro 1952
53 ISG Astro 1968 106 YAC Yacare
54 IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969 107 ZAN Zanderij
55 JOH Johnston Island 1961
9 Reference 9-16
9.4 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations
Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Acknowledge ACK Change CHG
Acquire, Acquisition ACQ Circularly Polarised CP
Acquisition Zone AZ Clear CLR
Adjust, Adjustment ADJ Closest Point of Approach CPA
Compact Disk Read Only
Aft AFT CDROM
Memory
Consistent Common Reference
Alarm ALARM CCRP
Point
Consistent Common Reference
Altitude ALT CCRS
System
Amplitude Modulation AM Contrast CONT
Anchor Watch ANCH Coordinated Universal Time UTC
Antenna ANT Correction CORR
Anti Clutter Rain RAIN Course CRS
Anti Clutter Sea SEA Course Over the Ground COG
April APR Course Through the Water CTW
Audible AUD Course To Steer CTS
August AUG Course Up C UP
Automatic AUTO Cross Track Distance XTD
Automatic Frequency Control AFC Cursor CURS
Automatic Gain Control AGC Dangerous Goods DG
Automatic Identification
AIS Date DATE
System
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid ARPA Day DAY
Dead Reckoning, Dead Reckoned
Autopilot AP DR
Position
ECDIS
Auxiliary System/Function AUX December DEC
Available AVAIL Decrease DECR
Azimuth Indicator AZI Delay DELAY
Background BKGND Delete DEL
Bearing BRG Departure DEP
Bearing Waypoint To Waypoint BWW Depth DPTH
Bow Crossing Range BCR Destination DEST
Bow Crossing Time BCT Deviation DEV
Brilliance BRILL Differential GLONASS DGLONASS
Built in Test Equipment BITE Differential GNSS DGNSS
Calibrate CAL Differential GPS DGPS
Cancel CNCL Digital Selective Calling DSC
Carried (for example, carried
C Display DISP
EBL origin)
Central Processing Unit CPU Distance DIST
Centre CENT Distance Root Mean Square DRMS
9-17 9 Reference
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)
Global Maritime Distress and
Distance To Go DTG GMDSS
Safety System
Global Navigation Satellite
Drift DRIFT GNSS
System
Dropped(for example, dropped EBL Global Orbiting Navigation
D GLONASS
origin) Satellite System
East E Global Positioning System GPS
Echo Reference REF Great Circle GC
Electronic Bearing Line EBL Grid GRID
Electronic Chart Display and
ECDIS Ground GND
Information System
Electronic Chart System ECS Grounding Avoidance System GAS
Electronic Navigational Chart ENC Group Repetition Interval GRI
Electronic Position Fixing System EPFS Guard Zone GZ
Electronic Range and Bearing Line ERBL Gyro GYRO
Emergency Position Indicating Radio Harmful Substances(applies
EPIRB HS
Beacon to AIS)
Enhance ENH Head Up H UP
Enter ENT Heading HDG
Equipment EQUIP Heading Control System HCS
Error ERR Heading Line HL
Estimated Position EP High Frequency HF
Estimated Time of Arrival ETA High Speed Craft HSC
Horizontal Dilution Of
Estimated Time of Departure ETD HDOP
Precision
European Geo-Stationary
EGNOS I - Band I-Band
Navigational Overlay System
Event EVENT Identification ID
Exclusion Zone EZ In IN
External EXT Increase INCR
F - Band (applies to Radar) F-Band Indication IND
February FEB Information INFO
Foreword FWD Infrared INF RED
Fishing Vessel FISH Initialization INIT
Fix FIX Input INP
Forward FWD Input/Output I/O
Frequency FREQ Integrated Bridge System IBS
Frequency Modulation FM Integrated Navigation System INS
Integrated Radio
Full FULL IRCS
Communication System
Gain GAIN Interference Rejection IR
Geographics GEOG Interswitch ISW
Geometric Dilution Of Precision GDOP Interval INT
9 Reference 9-18
January JAN North N
July JUL North Up N UP
June JUN Not Less Than NLT
Label LBL Not More Than NMT
Latitude LAT Not Under Command NUC
Latitude/Longitude L/L November NOV
Leeway LWY October OCT
Limit LIM Off OFF
Line Of Position LOP Officer On Watch OOW
Log LOG Offset OFFSET
Long Pulse LP On ON
Long Range LR Out/Output OUT
Longitude LON Own Ship OS
Loran LORAN Panel Illumination PANEL
Lost Target LOST LOST TGT Parallel Index Line PI
PAST
Low Frequency LF Past Positions
POSN
Magnetic MAG Passenger Vessel PASSV
Man Overboard MOB Performance Monitor MON
Manoeuvre MVR Permanent PERM
Manual MAN Person Overboard POB
Personal Identification
Map(s) MAP PIN
Number
March MAR Pilot Vessel PILOT
Maritime Mobile Services Identity
MMSI Port/Portside PORT
number
Maritime Pollutant (applies to AIS) MP Position POSN
ECDIS
Positional Dilution Of
Maritime Safety Information MSI PDOP
Precision
Marker MKR Power PWR
Master MSTR Predicted PRED
Maximum MAX Predicted Area of Danger PAD
Predicted Point of
May MAY PPC
Collision
Medium Frequency MF Pulse Length PL
Medium Pulse MP Pulse Modulation PM
Pulse Repetition
Menu MENU PRF
Frequency
Minimum MIN Pulse Repetition Rate PRR
Missing MISSING Pulses Per Revolution PPR
Mute MUTE Racon RACON
Navigation NAV Radar RADAR
Night NT Radar Plotting RP
Normal NORM Radius RAD
9-19 9 Reference
Rain RAIN Speed Over the Ground SOG
Range RNG Speed Through the Water STW
Range Rings RR Stabilized STAB
Raster Chart Display System RCDS Standby STBY
Raster Navigational Chart RNC Starboard/Starboard Side STBD
Rate Of Turn ROT Station STN
Real-time Kinemetic RTK Symbol(s) SYM
Receive Rx RX Synchronized/Synchronous SYNC
Receiver RCDR Target TGT
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
RAIM Target Tracking TT
Monitoring
Reference REF Test TEST
Relative REL Time TIME
Relative Motion RM Time Difference TD
Revolutions per Minute RPM Time Dilution Of Precision TDOP
Rhumb Line RL Time Of Arrival TOA
Roll On/Roll Off Vessel RoRo Time Of Departure TOD
Root Mean Square RMS Time to CPA TCPA
Route ROUTE Time To Go TTG
Safety Contour SF CNT Time to Wheel Over Line TWOL
Sailing Vessel SAIL Track TRK
Satellite SAT Track Control System TCS
S-Band S-BAND Tracking TRKG
Scan to Scan SC/SC Trail(s) TRAIL
Search And Rescue SAR Transmit and Receive TXRX
Search And Rescue Transponder SART Transceiver TCVR
Transferred Line Of
Search And Rescue Vessel SARV TPL
Position
Select SEL Transmit TX
September SEP Transmitter TMTR
Transmitting Heading
Sequence SEQ THD
Device
Set (i.e., set and drift, or setting a
SET Transponder TPR
value)
Ship’s Time TIME Trial TRAIL
Short Pulse SP Trigger Pulse TRIG
Signal to Noise Ratio SNR True T
Simulation SIM True Motion TM
Slave SLAVE Tune TUNE
South S Ultrahigh Frequency UHF
Uninterruptible Power
Speed SPD UPS
Supply
Speed and Distance Measuring Universal Time,
SDME UTC
Equipment Coordinated
9 Reference 9-20
Term Abbreviation Unit Abbreviation
Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Cable Length cbl
Cycles Per
Unstabilised UNSTAB cps
Second
Variable Range Marker VRM Degree(s) deg
Variation VAR Fathom(s) fm
Vector VECT Feet/Foot ft
Very High Frequency VHF Gigahertz GHz
Very Low Frequency VLF Hectopascal hPa
Vessel Aground GRND Hertz Hz
Vessel at Anchor ANCH Hour(s) hr(s)
Vessel Constrained by Draught VCD Kilohertz kHz
Vessel Engaged in Diving Operations DIVE Kilometre km
Vessel Engaged in Dredging or Underwater
DRG Kilopascal kPa
Operations
Vessel Engaged in Towing Operations TOW Knot(s) kn
Vessel Not Under Command NUC Megahertz MHz
Vessel Restricted in Manoeuvrability RIM Minute(s) min
Vessel Traffic Service VTS Nautical Mile(s) NM
Vessel Underway Using Engine UWE Second(s) sec
Video VID
Visual Display Unit VDU
Voyage VOY
Voyage Data Recorder VDR
Warning WARNING
Water WAT
Waypoint WPT
Waypoint Closure Velocity WCV
ECDIS
West W
Wheel Over Line WOL
Wheel Over Point WOP
Wheel Over Time WOT
World Geodetic System WGS
X-Band X-BAND
9-21 9 Reference
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS
can Import/Export
9.5.1 File Types
●Route files
●User chart files
●Logbook files
9.5.2 File Names

File type Import source file name Default export target file name
Route files ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ rtn_ (binary file name) .csv
– Normal
– TCS ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ rta_ (binary file name) .csv
– 2G TCS ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ –
User chart files ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ –
Logbooks – lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv
– Specified period Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv
– Selected log – lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv
Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv
9.5.3 CSV File Data Structure

●When importing files, character strings that come after “//” and until the end of the line are
handled as comments.
●Commas (,) are used as delimiters.
Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E
9 Reference 9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files
(1) Normal Routes
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import*1 Export*2
1*3 // (Space) Fixed character string ✔

ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC Fixed character string ✔
ECDIS.
2 // (Space) Fixed character string ✔
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character ✔
comment column/cells. You can string
edit freely.
Route name Route name of source file ✔
, Fixed character ✔
<Normal> Fixed character string ✔
Route comments Comments from the ✔
source file
WP No. Fixed character string ✔
Lat Fixed character string ✔
Lon Fixed character string ✔
, Fixed character ✔ ECDIS
Prt [nm] Fixed character ✔

Stb [nm] Fixed character ✔
Arr Rad [nm] Fixed character ✔
Speed [nm] Fixed character string ✔
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string ✔
*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)

*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)
9-23 9 Reference
(1) Normal Routes - continued
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import Export
Time Zone Fixed character string ✔

Name Fixed character string ✔
5 WP number 000 ✔ ✔
, Fixed character ✔ ✔
Latitude degree value 35 ✔ ✔
Latitude minute value 35.123 ✔ ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔ ✔
Longitude degree value 139 ✔ ✔
Longitude minute value 48.234 ✔ ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Port side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Starboard side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Arrival circle radius 0.50 ✔ ✔
Planned speed 12.30 ✔ ✔
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL ✔ ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔ ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Name Yokohama ✔ ✔
6 Repeat from line five for each ✔ ✔
waypoint.
• In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with “✻✻✻”.
9 Reference 9-24
‘(2) TCS Routes

ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC Fixed character string ✔
ECDIS.
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character ✔
edit freely.
Route name Route name of source file ✔
<ANTS> Fixed character string ✔
Route comments Comments from the ✔
source file
WP No. Fixed character string ✔
Prt [nm] Fixed character ✔ ECDIS
Stb [nm] Fixed character ✔
Speed [nm] Fixed character string ✔
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string ✔
ROT [deg/min] Fixed character string ✔
Turn Rad [nm] Fixed character string ✔
9-25 9 Reference
(2) TCS Routes - continued
Time Zone Fixed character string ✔

Name Fixed character string ✔
5 WP number 000 ✔ ✔
Latitude degree value 35 ✔ ✔
Latitude minute value 35.123 ✔ ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔ ✔
Longitude degree value 139 ✔ ✔
Longitude minute value 48.234 ✔ ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Port side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Starboard side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Planned speed 12.30 ✔ ✔
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL ✔ ✔
Turning rate 10.00 ✔ ✔
Turn circle radius 0.50 ✔ ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔ ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Name Yokohama ✔ ✔
6 Repeat from line five for each ✔ ✔
waypoint.
• In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with “✻✻✻”.
9 Reference 9-26
(3) 2G TCS Routes
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import
1 ; Fixed character
(Space) x 63 characters Fixed character string
2 WP number 000 ✔
Latitude degree value 3535.123 ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔
Longitude degree value 13948.234 ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔
Port side route width 0.50 ✔
Starboard side route width 0.50 ✔
Arrival circle radius 0.50 ✔
Planned speed 12.30 ✔
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL ✔
Turning rate 010.0 ✔
Turning circle radius 0.50 ✔
, Fixed character ✔ ECDIS
Time zone 09:00 ✔

Time zone code (E/W) E ✔
Name Yokohama ✔
3 Repeat from line second for each ✔
waypoint.
• In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.
9-27 9 Reference
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files
(1) Header Records
1 // (Space) Fixed character string

USER CHART SHEET exported Fixed character string
by JRC ECDIS.
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character
edit freely.
User chart name File name of the source file
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
User chart comments Comments from the
source file
9 Reference 9-28
(2) Object Records
a) Symbols
m // (Space) Fixed character string

SYMBOL Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
+3 SYMBOL Fixed character string ✔
Instruction name - 1 Instruction name ✔
+4 Comments Comments ✔
+5 Latitude degree value 35 ✔
Latitude minute value 35.123 ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔ ECDIS
Longitude degree value 139 ✔
Longitude minute value 48.234 ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔
• Unused instruction name fields are filled with “✻✻✻”.
9-29 9 Reference
b) (Poly) Lines

LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Add “END” to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 LINE Fixed character string ✔
Instruction name Instruction name ✔
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35 ✔
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123 ✔
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N ✔
Longitude degree value of the 139 ✔
apex
Longitude minute value of the 48.234 ✔
apex
Longitude code of the apex (E/W) E ✔
+n Repeat for the number of apexes ✔
plus five lines
END Fixed character string ✔
(position end)
• For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with “✻✻✻”.
• When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.
9 Reference 9-30
c) Arc

ARC Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Start Angle [deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle [deg] Fixed character string
+3 ARC Fixed character string ✔
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35 ✔
reference position
Latitude minute value of the 35.123 ✔
reference position
Latitude code of the reference N ✔ ECDIS
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
Longitude code of the reference E ✔
position (E/W)
Radius 2.0 ✔
9-31 9 Reference
c) Arc -continued
Starting angle 120.0 ✔

Ending angle 180.0 ✔
d) User Danger Lines

DANGER_LINE Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 DANGER_LINE Fixed character string ✔
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35 ✔
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123 ✔
apex
apex
Longitude code of the apex (E/W) E ✔
+n Repeat for the number of apexes ✔
plus two lines
(position end)
9 Reference 9-32
e) Polygons

POLYGON Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 POLYGON Fixed character string ✔
apex
apex
apex
apex ECDIS
Longitude code of the apex E ✔
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of ✔
apexes plus two lines
(position end)
9-33 9 Reference
f) Circles

CIRCLE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 CIRCLE Fixed character string ✔
reference position
reference position
Latitude code of the reference N ✔
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Radius 2.0 ✔
9 Reference 9-34
g) Ellipses

ELLIPSE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Horizontal Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Vertical Radius [nm] Fixed character string
+3 ELLIPSE Fixed character string ✔
reference position
reference position
position (N/S) ECDIS
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Horizontal radius 2.00 ✔
Vertical radius 1.50 ✔
9-35 9 Reference
h) Fans

FAN Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Start Angle [deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle [deg] Fixed character string
+3 FAN Fixed character string ✔
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Radius 2.0 ✔
Starting angle 120.0 ✔
Ending angle 180.0 ✔
9 Reference 9-36
i) User Danger Areas

DANGER_AREA Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 DANGER_AREA Fixed character string ✔
apex
apex
apex
apex ECDIS
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of ✔
apexes plus two lines
(position end)
9-37 9 Reference
j) Text

TEXT Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Rotation Fixed character string
+3 TEXT Fixed character string ✔
Text Fast current. Caution. ✔
apex
apex
apex
apex
(E/W)
Rotation angle 123 ✔
Font size 14 ✔
9 Reference 9-38
9.5.3.3 Logbook File

LOGBOOK SHEET exported by Fixed character string ✔
JRC ECDIS.
<<NOTE>>This strings // Variable length character ✔
indicate comment column/cells. string
You can edit freely.
3 No Fixed character string ✔
Date Fixed character string ✔
Time Fixed character string ✔
Event Fixed character string ✔
POS1 Fixed character string ✔
POS2 Fixed character string ✔
ECDIS
COG (˚) Fixed character string ✔
SOG (kt) Fixed character string ✔
Heading (˚) Fixed character string ✔
Log (kt) Fixed character string ✔
Av.Speed 4h (kt) Fixed character string ✔
Av.Speed 24h (kt) Fixed character string ✔
9-39 9 Reference
Logbook File (continued)
Voyage Dist. (G)(nm) Fixed character string ✔

Voyage Dist. (W)(nm) Fixed character string ✔
Charts Fixed character string ✔
Set (˚) Fixed character string ✔
Drift (kt), Fixed character string ✔
Wind Dir. (˚), Fixed character string ✔
Wind Speed (m/sec) Fixed character string ✔
Wave Height (m) Fixed character string ✔
Air Press (hPa) Fixed character string ✔
Temp. (˚C) Fixed character string ✔
Water Temp. (˚C) Fixed character string ✔
Engine Rev. (r/min) Fixed character string ✔
Comment Fixed character string ✔
4 Number 0001 ✔
, ✔
Date (LMT) 2002/04/09 ✔
, ✔
Time (LMT) 08:45:24 ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔
, ✔
Event type Specified time ✔
, ✔
POS1 name GPS1 ✔
, ✔
POS2 name GPS2 ✔
, ✔
9 Reference 9-40

Latitude degree value for POS1 35 ✔
, ✔
Latitude minute value for POS1 35.123 ✔
, ✔
Latitude code for POS1 (N/S) N ✔
, ✔
Longitude degree value for 139 ✔
POS1
, ✔
Longitude minute value for 48.234 ✔
POS1
, ✔
Longitude code for POS1 (E/W) E ✔
, ✔
Course relative to land 123.4 ✔
, ✔
Ship speed relative to land 12.3 ✔
, ✔
Bow heading 123.5 ✔
, ✔
Ship speed relative to water 12.4 ✔
, ✔
Average ship speed for last four 12.0 ✔
hours
, ✔
Average ship speed for last 24 13.2 ✔
hours
, ✔
Total distance relative to land 12345.5 ✔ ECDIS
, ✔
Total distance relative to water 12300.6 ✔
, ✔
Chart name that caused the JP34OBJ ✔
event
, ✔
Set 123.4 ✔
, ✔
Drift 12.4 ✔
, ✔
Wind direction 234.5 ✔
, ✔
Wind speed 10.3 ✔
, ✔
Wave height 2.0 ✔
, ✔
9-41 9 Reference
Atmospheric pressure 1003 ✔

, ✔
Air temperature 23.4 ✔
, ✔
Water temperature 20.3 ✔
, ✔
Engine revolutions 135.6 ✔
, ✔
Comments Comments ✔
n Repeat four lines for the number ✔
of events.
9 Reference 9-42
9.6 Display Symbols
Display Symbols on Manual Update
(1) Symbol Tab

Category Method Graphic
Circle
Triangle
Square
General
Diamond
Multiple Mark
Warning
Manual Updates Delete Symbol
Anchor Point
Anchor Area
Anchor
Anchor Berth
Anchor Prohibited Area
Light flare, default

ECDIS
Light flare, red
Buoys Barrel buoy Light flare, green
Light flare, white/yellow
without light
9-43 9 Reference
(1) Symbol Tab - continued
Light flare, red
Can buoy Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Conical buoy Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Light flare, red
Installation buoy Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Mooring buoy, barrel shape Light flare, green
without light
9 Reference 9-44
Light flare, red
Mooring buoy, can shape Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Cone point up Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Light flare, red
Cone point
Pillar buoy Light flare, green
down

ECDIS
without light
Light flare, red
2cones point
Light flare, green
upward
without light
9-45 9 Reference
Light flare, red
2cones point
Light flare, green
downward
without light
Light flare, red
2cones base
Light flare, green
to base
without light
Buoys Pillar buoy
Light flare, red
2cones point
Light flare, green
to point
without light
Light flare, red
Sphere Light flare, green
without light
9 Reference 9-46
Light flare, red
2 sphere Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Cylinder Light flare, green
without light
Buoys Pillar buoy
Light flare, red
Board Light flare, green

ECDIS
without light
Light flare, red
Cube point up Light flare, green
without light
9-47 9 Reference
Light flare, red
Flag or other
Light flare, green
shape
without light
Light flare, red
Pillar buoy T-shape Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Light flare, red
X-shape Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Spherical buoy Light flare, green
without light
9 Reference 9-48
Light flare, red
Spar buoy Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Buoys Super-buoy Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
LANBY, super-buoy Light flare, green
ECDIS
without light
Light flare, red
Lights float Light float Light flare, green
without light
9-49 9 Reference
Light flare, red
Lights float Light vessel Light flare, green
without light
Beacon in general
Cone point up
Cone point down
2cones point upward
2cones point downward
2cones base to base
2cones point to point
Sphere
Beacons Beacon in general 2 sphere
Cylinder
Board
Cube point up
X-shape
Upright cross
Beacon point down
Beacon point up
T-shape
9 Reference 9-50
Lattice beacon
Lattice beacon Cone point up
Cone point down
2cones point upward
2cones base to base
Lattice beacon
2cones point to point
Sphere
2 sphere
Beacon tower
Cone point up
Beacons
Cone point down
2cones point upward

ECDIS
2cones base to base
Beacon tower 2cones point to point
Sphere
Cylinder
Board
Cube point up
X-shape
Upright cross
9-51 9 Reference
Beacon point down
Beacon point up
T-shape
2 sphere
Cylinder
Board
Beacons Beacon tower
Cube point up
X-shape
Upright cross
Beacon point down
Beacon point up
T-shape
Berth number
Ferry area
Cable ferry area
Fortified structure
Conspicuous fortified structure
Fish trap, fish weir, tunny net
Fish stakes
Ports and Harbors

Fishing harbor
Fish farm
RoRo terminal
Mooring dolphin
Deviation mooring dolphin
Pile or bollard
Yacht harbor, marina
9 Reference 9-52
Airport
Opening bridge
Buildings
Built-up area
Non-conspicuous religious building, Christian
Conspicuous religious building, Christian
Non-conspicuous religious building, on-Christian
Conspicuous religious building, non-Christian
Minaret
Conspicuous minaret
Single building
Conspicuous single building
Cairn
Conspicuous cairn
Chimney
Buildings
ECDIS
Conspicuous chimney
Cranes
Dome
Conspicuous dome
Dish aerial
Conspicuous dish aerial
Flagstaff ,flagpole
Flare stack
9-53 9 Reference
Conspicuous flare stack
Hulk
Monument
Conspicuous monument
Mast
Conspicuous mast
Mine, quarry
Quarry
Refinery
Conspicuous refinery
Silo
Conspicuous silo
Buildings
Timber yard
Tank
Conspicuous tank
Tank farm
Conspicuous tank farm
Tower
Conspicuous tower
Water tower
Conspicuous water tower
Radio, television tower
Conspicuous radio, television tower
9 Reference 9-54
Wind-motor
Conspicuous wind-motor
Wind generator farm
Buildings
Conspicuous wind generator farm
Windmill
Conspicuous windmill
Navigable lock gate
Artificial Feature Non-navigable lock gate
Offshore platform
Coastguard station
Rescue station
Miscellaneous Station
Pilot station
Signal station
Mariner's information note
Caution
ECDIS
Mariner's caution note
Underwater hazard with a defined depth
Underwater hazard with depth greater than 20

Dangerous
meters
Hazard on the surface
Isolated danger of depth less than the safety
contour
Obstructions, depth not stated
Obstructions Obstructions in the intertidal area
Obstructions
Obstructions in the water which is always above
water level
9-55 9 Reference
Dangerous underwater rock of uncertain depth
Rock which covers and uncovers or is awash at low
water
Wreck showing any portion of hull or superstructure

Obstructions
at level of chart datum
Non-dangerous wreck, depth unknown
Dangerous wreck, depth unknown
Direction of buoyage
Direction and color of buoyage for approaching
harbor in IALA region A(red to port)
Direction and color of buoyage for approaching
harbor in IALA region B(green to port)
Fairway with one-way traffic in direction indicated
Fairway with two-way traffic
Inshore traffic
Recommended traffic direction between parts of a
traffic separation scheme, or for ships not needing a
deep water route
Recommended two-way track as an area, based on
fixed marks
Routes
Recommended one-way track as an area, based on
fixed marks
Traffic roundabout
Reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way route of a
traffic separation scheme
Single traffic directions in a two-way route of a traffic
separation scheme
Traffic crossing area
Part of deep water route
Reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way part of a
deep-water route
Traffic direction in a one way lane of a traffic
separation scheme
Restricted Area Prohibited or restricted area
9 Reference 9-56
Fishing ground
Fishing Ground Fish haven
Fishing or trawling is prohibited or restricted
Radio calling-in point for traffic in one direction only
Radio calling-in point for traffic in both directions
Radio station
Rader transponder beacon
Rader conspicuous
Radio/Rader
Rader reflector
Rader scanner
Conspicuous radar scanner
Rader reflector
Fog signal Fog signal
Magnetic anomaly at a point
Magnetic anomaly along a line or over an area

ECDIS
Local Magnetic anomaly
Magnetic variation at a point
Magnetic variation along a line or over an area
Hill or mountain top
Conspicuous hill or mountain top
Cable area
Natural Feature/Seabed Foul area of seabed safe for navigation but not for
anchoring
Sand waves
Spring
Weed, kelp
Unknown ? Mark
9-57 9 Reference
(2) Line Tab
Category Method Symbol
Simple Line
General Arc
warning Line
Manual Updates Deletion by a manual updates
Boundary of an anchorage area

Anchor
Boundary of area where anchoring is prohibited or
restricted
Ferry route
Ferry Routes
Cable ferry route
Ports and Harbors Fishing stakes
Caution Boundary of area with a specific caution
Boundary of area to be navigated with caution
Two-way deep water route centerline, based on fixed

marks
One-way deep water route centerline, based on fixed
marks
Boundary of deep water route
Regulated two-way recommended route centerline,

Routes based on fixed marks
Regulated one-way recommended route centerline,
based on fixed marks
Non-Regulated two-way recommended track, based
on fixed marks
Non-Regulated one-way recommended track, based
on fixed marks
Boundary of an area where enter is prohibited or
Restricted Area restricted
Boundary of a restricted area
Administrated Area Jurisdiction boundary
Boundary of an area where trawling or fishing is

Fishing Ground
prohibited or restricted
Boundary of a submarine cable area
Submarine cable
Cable/Pipe
Oil, gas pipeline, submerged or on land
Water pipeline, sewer, etc.
9 Reference 9-58
(2) Line Tab (continued)
Boundary between IALA-A and IALA-B systems of
lateral buoys and beacons
Boundary of a navigation feature such as a fairway,
magnetic anomaly, etc.
Boundary of a submarine pipeline with potentially
Miscellaneous
dangerous contents
Boundary
Boundary of a submarine pipeline with potentially
non-dangerous contents
Change of depth unit line, bounds 'fathom depths'
Change of depth unit line, bounds 'meter depths'
Unknown ? Mark
(3) Area Tab

Polygon
Circle
(Area)
ECDIS
Ellipse
Fan
Warning Area
(4) Text Tab

Small font
(Text)
Large font
9-59 9 Reference
9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS
The following description is list of set when starting “Navigation & Planning”.
(1) Display Panel
No. Category Contents Set when starting

1 Own Ship Information HDG Value input from sensor
2 STW Value input from sensor
3 COG Value input from sensor
4 SOG Value input from sensor
5 Time Value input from sensor
6 Position Value input from sensor
7 CTS Value input from sensor
8 Vector Value input from sensor
9 Depth Value input from sensor
10 Other Ship Information Setting RADAR (Display ON/OFF) OFF
11 TT1 (Display ON/OFF) OFF
12 TT2 (Display ON/OFF) OFF
13 AIS (Display ON/OFF) OFF
14 Association (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
15 AIS Filter Ring (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
16 Sector (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
17 Auto Sail Status Auto Sail Mode NotRDY
18 Course change Mode (blank)
19 Sailing Status (blank)
20 Steer mode (blank)
21 Route Watch Route UNLOAD
22 To WPT (blank)
23 DIST ****.*
24 BRG ***.*
25 Route Information - CALC DEST (WPT) 0
26 DEST (Distance) ****.*
27 SPD (Actual/CALC) Actual
28 SPD (Speed) **.*
29 TTG *****:**:**
30 ETA **_** **:**
9 Reference 9-60
Set value list when starting ECDIS - Display Panel (continued)
31 Route Information - CALC Set Calculated by the difference between the
COG and HDG vectors
32 Drift Calculated by the difference between the

COG and HDG vectors
33 Route Information - Route Final ETA **_** **:**

34 Total DIST ***.*
35 Route Information - WPT To/Next To
36 WPT No. *******
37 Comment (blank)
38 LAT ** **.***'*
39 LON *** **.***'*
40 Chart information Chart Type The value when ending last time
41 Chart information Display Category The value when ending last time
42 (S-57/C-MAP2/C-MAP3) Scale/Range The value when ending last time
43 Scale The value when ending last time
44 Range The value when ending last time
45 Motion Mode The value when ending last time
46 Azimuth Mode The value when ending last time
47 Rotation degree The value when ending last time
48 Chart information (ARCS) Select Chart The value when ending last time
49 Motion Mode The value when ending last time
50 Tools (EBL/VRM) EBL1 (Display ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
51 EBL1 (Active/Inactive） The value when ending last time
52 EBL1 (Azimuth T/R) The value when ending last time
53 EBL1 (Base Point Mode) The value when ending last time
54 VRM1 (Display ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
55 VRM1 (Active/Inactive） The value when ending last time ECDIS
56 VRM1 (Units of Distance) The value when ending last time

57 EBL2 (Display ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
58 EBL2 (Active/Inactive） The value when ending last time
59 EBL2 (Azimuth T/R) The value when ending last time
60 EBL2 (Base Point Mode) The value when ending last time
61 VRM2 (Display ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
62 VRM2 (Active/Inactive） The value when ending last time
63 VRM2 (Units of Distance) The value when ending last time
64 Brilliance PANEL The value when ending last time
65 VID The value when ending last time
66 TGT The value when ending last time
67 Day-Night level The value when ending last time
68 Cursor position Azimuth T/R T (True North mode)
69 Unit of Distance NM
70 TCS Bar Unit of Distance The value when ending last time
71 Running Fix (Context Menu) (Display Running Fix) Removed
9-61 9 Reference
(2) Menu setting

1 AIS/TT TT1 (ON/OFF) OFF
2 TT2 (ON/OFF) OFF
3 AIS (ON/OFF) OFF
4 All (ON/OFF) OFF
5 Deactive All AIS - -
6 All List - Not Display
7 Select List - Not Display
8 Target Track – Target Track Function The value when ending last time
9 Target Track Setting Target Memory Interval The value when ending last time
10 Clear Track Color The value when ending last time
11 Clear Track Number The value when ending last time
12 Target Track – Color - All The value when ending last time
Target Track Setting
13 Color - Target Track No.1 The value when ending last time
"Target Track Color &
Display"
23 Color - Other The value when ending last time
24 Display - All The value when ending last time
25 Display - Target Track No.1 The value when ending last time
35 Display - Other The value when ending last time
36 Target Track - File Operation Target Track Display
37 Own Ship's AIS Data All Contents Value input from sensor
38 Message – -
Addressed Message
39 Message – -
Broadcast Message
9 Reference 9-62
Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)
40 AIS/TT AIS Sentence - VDM1 -
41 AIS Sentence - TTD1 -
42 AIS Sentence - TTD2 -
43 AIS/TT Setting Display TT Vector The value when ending last time
44 AIS/TT Past Position The value when ending last time
45 Target Number - AIS The value when ending last time
46 Target Number - TT The value when ending last time
47 AIS Filter - Ring (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
48 AIS Filter - Ring (Range) The value when ending last time
49 AIS Filter - Sector (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
50 AIS Filter - Sector (Angle) The value when ending last time
51 Filter Mode The value when ending last time
52 Filter Display The value when ending last time
53 CPA The value when ending last time
54 TCPA The value when ending last time
55 AIS Lost Alarm The value when ending last time
56 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm The value when ending last time
57 Association Setting Association The value when ending last time
58 Synchronized with TTD The value when ending last time
59 Priority The value when ending last time
60 Bearing The value when ending last time
61 Range The value when ending last time
62 Course The value when ending last time
63 Speed The value when ending last time
64 Auto Sail Start (Normal） To Waypoint The value when ending last time
65 Start (TCS) To Waypoint The value when ending last time
66 Pre Run Speed Value of STW
ECDIS
67 Pre Run Time The value when ending last time
68 Enter Angle The value when ending last time
69 Turn Rate The value when ending last time
70 Pre Run Distance The value when ending last time
71 XTD MAX The value when ending last time
72 Setting (Type 1) Turning Gain The value when ending last time
73 Setting (Type 2) XTD MAX The value when ending last time
74 Drift Correction The value when ending last time
75 Dead Band （ON/OFF） The value when ending last time
76 Dead Band The value when ending last time
77 Auto Stop The value when ending last time
78 Setting (Type 3) Track Gain The value when ending last time
79 Drift Correction The value when ending last time
80 Dead Band （ON/OFF） The value when ending last time
81 Dead Band The value when ending last time
9-63 9 Reference
82 Route Route Planning – - -
Table Editor
83 Route Planning – - -
Graphic Editor
84 Create Alternate Route - Cannot be selected
85 Distance Measurement - Cannot be selected
86 From Way Point
87 From - WPT No. 00
88 To Way Point
89 To - WPT No. 00
90 Use XTD Alarm (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
91 Setting Date/Time for monitoring The value when ending last time
92 Select Route - The value when ending last time
ETA (ON/OFF)
93 Default - Width Prt The value when ending last time
94 Default - Width Stb The value when ending last time
95 Default - Arr Radius The value when ending last time
96 Default - Speed The value when ending last time
97 Default - Sail The value when ending last time
98 Default - Turn Rate The value when ending last time
99 Default - Turn Radius The value when ending last time
100 Default - Time Zone The value when ending last time
101 Max. Latitude The value when ending last time
102 Tau Multiplier for Limit Check The value when ending last time
103 Check Safety The value when ending last time
in Editing (ON/OFF)
104 Route Type The value when ending last time
105 Side Sign Color The value when ending last time
106 Display Side Sign (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
107 Ownship/ Adjust - Cursor - -
108 Track Adjust - Enter Position LAT Current Position of Own ship
109 LON Current Position of Own ship
110 Adjust - Enter Offset LAT The value when ending last time
111 LON The value when ending last time
112 Anchor Watch – Radius The value when ending last time
Create Monitoring Circle
9 Reference 9-64
113 Ownship/ Setting Ship's Name The value when ending last time
114 Track Own Ship Symbol The value when ending last time
115 Display Heading Line The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
116 Display Beam Line (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
117 Vector – The value when ending last time
Display Over the Ground
118 Vector – The value when ending last time
Display Through the water
119 Vector - Vector Time The value when ending last time
120 Vector - Display Vector Time The value when ending last time
Mark (ON/OFF)
121 Vector - Display Vector Time The value when ending last time
Mark (Interval Time)
122 Track - Display Past Track The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
123 Track - Color The value when ending last time
124 Track - Track Period The value when ending last time
125 Track - Past POSN The value when ending last time
126 Track - Display Time Label The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
127 Track - Interval The value when ending last time
128 Danger Detection - Display The value when ending last time
Vector Area (ON/OFF)
129 Danger Detection - Display The value when ending last time
Sector Area (ON/OFF)
130 Danger Detection – See "Main - Setting - Alarm
Set Alarm Limit Setting" ECDIS
131 User Map Selecting User Map Unselected

132 Select User Map - -
133 Unselect User Map - -
134 User Map Editor - -
135 Chart Marking/Highlighting – LAT Current Position of Own ship
136 Event Mark LON Current Position of Own ship
137 MIN Scale 1:100,000,000
138 MAX Scale 1:1000
139 ID Automatically set
140 Time Current Time (UTC)
141 Comment (blank)
142 Marking/Highlighting – LAT Current Position of Own ship
143 Information Mark LON Current Position of Own ship
144 MIN Scale 1:100,000,000
146 Comment (blank)
9-65 9 Reference
147 Chart Marking/Highlighting – LAT Current Position of Own ship
148 Tidal Stream Mark LON Current Position of Own ship
149 MIN Scale 1:100,000,000
151 Set/Drift/Time Actual
(Actual/Redirected)
152 Set/Drift/Time (Direction) 000
153 Set/Drift/Time (Speed) 0.0
154 Set/Drift/Time (Time) Current Time (UTC)
155 Comment (blank)
156 Marking/Highlighting – LAT/LON (blank)
157 Highlight MIN Scale 1:100,000,000
159 Marking/Highlighting – - -
Delete Event mark
160 Off Center - Enter Position LAT Current Position of
chart displaying center
161 LON Current Position of
chart displaying center
162 Off Center - Home - -
163 User Setting – Name (blank)
Save My Port List
164 User Setting - My Port List - -
165 User Setting – Name (blank)
Save Chart Setting
166 User Setting – - -
Chart Setting List
167 Select S-57 Chart - -
168 Fix View (ON/OFF) OFF
169 Accept S-57 Updates - -
170 Graphical Index Display ENC Data (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
171 Display Chart Name The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
172 Chart Boundary - Overview The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
173 Chart Boundary - General The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
174 Chart Boundary - Coastal The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
175 Chart Boundary - Approach The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
176 Chart Boundary - Harbor The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
177 Chart Boundary - Berthing The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
9 Reference 9-66
178 Chart Manual Update - -
179 Multi View Single View Single View
Top Bottom
Right Top View
Left Top View
Right Bottom View
Left Bottom View
180 Select Area -
181 Wide Range View (ON/OFF) OFF
182 Chart Portfolio - Create - -
183 Chart Portfolio - Top Window - -
184 Chart Abbreviation - -
185 ARCS – - -
Temporary and Preliminary
186 ARCS - Adjust Datum Offset (Setting Offset) The value when ending last time
187 LAT The value when ending last time
188 LON The value when ending last time
189 ARCS – Geodetic Datum - From (blank)
190 Datum Transformation Reference Position - LAT 0 00.000N
191 Reference Position - LON 0 00.000E
192 Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Display Category The value when ending last time
(View Common)
193 Area Boundary The value when ending last time
194 Depth Alarm – The value when ending last time
Shallow Contour
195 Depth Alarm - Safety Contour The value when ending last time
196 Depth Alarm - Safety Depth The value when ending last time
197 Depth Alarm - Deep Contour The value when ending last time ECDIS
Two color Depth (ON/OFF)
Shallow Pattern (ON/OFF)
200 Depth Alarm - Show Isolated The value when ending last time
Danger In Shallow Water
(ON/OFF)
201 Redraw - Border Range The value when ending last time
202 Redraw - Margin The value when ending last time
203 Chart Symbol The value when ending last time
204 Chart Symbol - Full Light The value when ending last time
Line(ON/OFF)
205 Chart Symbol – Consider The value when ending last time
Scale Minimum (ON/OFF)
206 C-MAP Ed.3 Database The value when ending last time
(Display and ON/OFF setting)
9-67 9 Reference
207 Chart Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Type The value when ending last time
(View 1)
208 Text Size The value when ending last time
209 Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS [S]unknown object The value when ending last time
(View 1) (Layer) (S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
210 [S]Land region, The value when ending last time

Sea area/named water area
211 [S]Causeway, Dam, Dyke, The value when ending last time
Gate
212 [S]Dyke, Slope topline, The value when ending last time
Airport, Bulding, single,
Crane, Landmark,
Built-up area
213 [S]Swept area The value when ending last time
214 [S]Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, The value when ending last time
Submarine
215 [S]Navigation line The value when ending last time
216 [S]Recommended track The value when ending last time
217 [S]Ferry route The value when ending last time
218 [S]Radar range, Radar line The value when ending last time
219 [S]Restricted area The value when ending last time
220 [S]Ferry route, Military The value when ending last time
practice area, Offshore
production area
221 [S]Caution area, Fairway The value when ending last time
222 [S]Fishing ground, Marine The value when ending last time
farm/culture
223 [S]Anchorage area, Anchor The value when ending last time
berth
224 [S]Cable area, Pipeline area The value when ending last time
225 [S]Dumping ground, Cargo The value when ending last time
transshipment area,
Incineration area
226 [S]Daymark The value when ending last time
227 [S]Navigational system mark The value when ending last time
228 [S]topmarks The value when ending last time
(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
229 [S]light The value when ending last time
230 [S]Fog signal, Retro-reflector, The value when ending last time
Radar transponder beacon,
Radar reflector
231 [S]Pilot boarding place, Signal The value when ending last time
station, Trafic, Signal
station, Warning
9 Reference 9-68
232 Chart Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS [O]Quality of data The value when ending last time
233 (View 1) (Layer) [O]Nautical publication The value when ending last time
information
234 [O]Coverage, Compilation The value when ending last time
scale of data
235 [O]Local magnetic anomary, The value when ending last time
Magnetic variation
236 [O]Sloping ground, Land The value when ending last time
elevation, Slope topline
237 [O]Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, The value when ending last time
River, Water fall, Tideway
238 [O]Building, Fortified The value when ending last time
structure, Land mark,
Silo/Tank, Airport, Road,
Railway
239 [O]Check point, Harbour The value when ending last time
facility
240 [O]Distance mark The value when ending last time
241 [O]Berch, Crane, Drydock, The value when ending last time
Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
242 [O]Sounding The value when ending last time
243 [O]Depth area, Depth counter The value when ending last time
244 [O]Water turbulance, Tide..., The value when ending last time
Current-non-gravitational
245 [O]Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, The value when ending last time
Spring
246 [O]Fishing-facility The value when ending last time
247 [O]Obstruction, Wreck, The value when ending last time ECDIS
Underwater/Awash rock
248 [O]Cable, Submarine, The value when ending last time
Pipeline, Submarine/on land
249 [O]Continental shelf area The value when ending last time
250 [O]Custom zone, Free port The value when ending last time
area, Harbour area
251 [O]Fishery zone The value when ending last time
252 [O]Administration area, The value when ending last time
Contiguous zone, Exclusive
economic zone
253 [O]Radar station, Radio The value when ending last time
station, Coastguard station,
Rescure station
254 [-]Updated Objects The value when ending last time
(S-57 Only)
9-69 9 Reference
255 Chart Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Important text The value when ending last time
(View 1) (Vertical Clearance bridge,
(Text) overhead cable, so on)
256 Other text The value when ending last time
(Name of building so on)
(C-MAP Ed.3 only)
257 Name/Number of: buoys, The value when ending last time
beacons, so on
258 Light description The value when ending last time
259 Note on chart data or nautical The value when ending last time
publication
260 Nature of seabed The value when ending last time
261 Geographic names The value when ending last time
262 Value of: magnetic variation, The value when ending last time
swept depth
263 Height of islet or land feature The value when ending last time
264 Berth number The value when ending last time
265 National language The value when ending last time
266 Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Type The value when ending last time
(View 2)
267 Text Size The value when ending last time
268 Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS [S]unknown object The value when ending last time
(View 2) (S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)
(Layer)
269 [S]Land reagion, Sea The value when ending last time
area/named water area
270 [S]Causeway, Dam, Dyke, The value when ending last time
Gate
271 [S]Dyke, Slope topline, The value when ending last time
Airport, Bulding, single,
Crane, Landmark,
Built-up area
272 [S]Swept area The value when ending last time
273 [S]Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, The value when ending last time
Submarine
274 [S]Navigation line The value when ending last time
275 [S]Recommended track The value when ending last time
276 [S]Ferry route The value when ending last time
277 [S]Radar range, Radar line The value when ending last time
278 [S]Restricted area The value when ending last time
9 Reference 9-70
279 Chart Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS [S]Ferry route, Military The value when ending last time
(View 2) practice area, Offshore
(Layer) production area
280 [S]Caution area, Fairway The value when ending last time
281 [S]Fishing ground, Marine The value when ending last time
farm/culture
282 [S]Anchorage area, Anchor The value when ending last time
berth
283 [S]Cable area, Pipeline area The value when ending last time
284 [S]Dumping ground, Cargo The value when ending last time
transshipment area,
Incineration area
285 [S]Daymark The value when ending last time
286 [S]Navigational system mark The value when ending last time
287 [S]topmarks The value when ending last time
288 [S]light The value when ending last time
289 [S]Fog signal, Retro-reflector, The value when ending last time
Radar transponder beacon,
Radar reflector
290 [S]Pilot boarding place, Signal The value when ending last time
station, Trafic, Signal
station, Warning
291 [O]Quality of data The value when ending last time
292 [O]Nautical publication The value when ending last time
information
293 [O]Coverage, Compilation The value when ending last time ECDIS
scale of data
294 [O]Local magnetic anomary, The value when ending last time
Magnetic variation
295 [O]Sloping ground, Land The value when ending last time
elevation, Slope topline
296 [O]Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, The value when ending last time
River, Water fall, Tideway
297 [O]Building, Fortified The value when ending last time
structure, Land mark,
Silo/Tank, Airport, Road,
Railway
298 [O]Check point, Harbor The value when ending last time
facility
299 [O]Distance mark The value when ending last time
300 [O]Berch, Crane, Drydock, The value when ending last time
Mooring/Warping facility,
Gate
301 [O]Sounding The value when ending last time
9-71 9 Reference
302 Chart Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS [O]Depth area, Depth counter The value when ending last time
303 (View 2) [O]Water turbulance, Tide..., The value when ending last time
(Layer) Current-non-gravitational
304 [O]Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, The value when ending last time
Spring
305 [O]Fishing-facility The value when ending last time
306 [O]Obstruction, Wreck, The value when ending last time
Underwater/Awash rock
307 [O]Cable, Submarine, The value when ending last time
Pipeline, Submarine/on land
308 [O]Continental shelf area The value when ending last time
309 [O]Custom zone, Free port The value when ending last time
area, Harbour area
310 [O]Fishery zone The value when ending last time
311 [O]Administration area, The value when ending last time
Contiguous zone, Exclusive
economic zone
312 [O]Radar station, Radio The value when ending last time
station, Coastguard station,
Rescure station
313 [-]Updated Objects The value when ending last time
(S-57 Only)
314 Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Important text The value when ending last time
(View 2) (Vertical Clearance bridge,
(Text) overhead cable, so on)
315 Other text The value when ending last time
(Name of building so on)
(C-MAP Ed.3 only)
316 Name/Number of: buoys, The value when ending last time
beacons, so on
317 Light description The value when ending last time
318 Note on chart data or nautical The value when ending last time
publication
319 Nature of seabed The value when ending last time
320 Geographic names The value when ending last time
321 Value of: magnetic variation, The value when ending last time
swept depth
322 Height of islet or land feature The value when ending last time
323 Berth number The value when ending last time
324 National language The value when ending last time
9 Reference 9-72
325 Chart Setting - Other Chart Mariner's Mark/Line - The value when ending last time
Clearing Line (ON/OFF)
326 Mariner's Mark/Line – The value when ending last time
Tidal Stream (ON/OFF)
Highlighting (ON/OFF)
Event Mark (ON/OFF)
Reference Point (ON/OFF)
Information (ON/OFF)
Navtex Mark (ON/OFF)
332 User Chart – The value when ending last time
Symbol (ON/OFF)
333 User Chart - Line – The value when ending last time
Simple Line, Warning Line
(ON/OFF)
334 User Chart – Line – Arc The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
335 User Chart - Area - Polygon, The value when ending last time
Warning Area (ON/OFF)
336 User Chart - Area – The value when ending last time
Circle (ON/OFF)
337 User Chart - Area – The value when ending last time
Ellipse (ON/OFF)
338 User Chart – Area – The value when ending last time ECDIS
Fan (ON/OFF)
339 User Chart - Text (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
340 Main EBL Maneuver (Displaying EBL Maneuver) Removed
341 Reach 600
342 Turn Mode Radius
343 Turn Set - Radius 0.5
344 Turn Set - Rate 30.0
345 Cross Bearing (Displaying Cross Bearing) Removed
346 LAT Current Position of Own ship
347 LON Current Position of Own ship
348 Bearing 180
349 Distance The value depended on the scale
350 True/Reverse The value when ending last time
351 Create Clearing Line – (Displaying Clearing Line) Displaying
Not Less Than
352 Create Clearing Line – (Displaying Clearing Line) Displaying
Not More Than
9-73 9 Reference
353 Main LOP - Create LOP (Displaying LOP) Removed
354 Latitude Current Position of Own ship
355 Longitude Current Position of Own ship
356 Type (Select Bearing/Range) The value when ending last time
357 Type (Angle) 0.0
358 Type (Distance) The value depended on the scale
359 Time Current Time (LMT)
360 LOP - Delete All LOP - -
361 Print - -
362 Save Screen - -
363 Logbook (Filter) Logbook Setting See "Main - Setting -
Logbook Setting"
364 Logbook (Column Setting) Date (ON/OFF) ON (Fixed Display)
365 Time (ON/OFF) ON (Fixed Display)
366 Event (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
367 POSN1 (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
368 POSN2 (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
369 Latitude (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
370 Longitude (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
371 COG(ﾟ) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
372 SOG(kn) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
373 HDG(ﾟ) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
374 STW(kn) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
375 Av.Speed 4h(kn) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
376 Av.Speed 24h(kn) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
377 Voyage DIST(G)(NM) The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
378 Voyage DIST(W)(NM) The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
379 Charts (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
380 Set(ﾟ) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
381 Drift(kn) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
382 Wind Dir(ﾟ) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
383 Wind Speed(m/sec) The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
384 Wave Dir(ﾟ) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
385 Wave Height(m) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
386 Air Press(hPa) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
387 Temp(ﾟ C) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
388 Water Temp(ﾟ C) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
389 Engine Rev(rpm) (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
390 Comment (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
391 (The Order of Display) The value when ending last time
9 Reference 9-74
392 Main Logbook (View Navtex) Marking on the Chart The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF) (Setting Each Navtex)
393 Expire Date (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Navtex)
394 Expire Date (Date) The value when ending last time
395 (Navtex Position) The value when ending last time
396 Logbook (Delete Navtex) Deleted Range Selected Message
(Selected Message/Before
specified date/All Message)
397 Before specified date (Date) Current Date (UTC)
398 Logbook (View REF Point) - -
399 Logbook (Export) Export Range (Selected Selected Message
Message/ From - To)
400 From (Date) Current Date (UTC)
401 To (Date) Current Date (UTC)
402 Save As - Filename LOGBOOK.csv
403 Save As - Folder ECDIS_DATA¥TMP
404 Logbook (Print) Print Range (Selected Selected Message
Message/ From - To)
405 From (Date) Current Date (UTC)
406 To (Date) Current Date (UTC)
407 Logbook (Jump) - -
408 Logbook (Input) Wind Dir. The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
409 Wind Speed The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log) ECDIS
410 Wave Dir. The value when ending last time

(Setting Each Log)
411 Wave Height The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
412 Air Press The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
413 Air Temp The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
414 Water Temp The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
415 Engine Rev. The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
416 Comment The value when ending last time
(Setting Each Log)
9-75 9 Reference
417 Main Multi Window Preset
418 Analog Meter -
419 Climate
420 Draft
421 Current Wind
422 Course Rudder Graph
423 Course Bar
424 Ship
425 Engine Graph
426 Depth Graph
427 Current
428 DIR/DIST EXP Display
429 Numeric NAV INFO
430 Wind Graph
431 TEMP Graph Setting
432 Preset Save
433 Option
434 Rader Overlay - Radar 1 (ON/OFF) OFF
435 Rader Overlay - Radar 2 (ON/OFF) OFF
436 Rader Overlay – (ON/OFF) OFF
Range Rings
437 Rader Overlay –
Bearing Scale
438 Rader Overlay - Option IR(Interference Rejection) The value when ending last time
439 Gain Adjust The value when ending last time
440 Sea Adjust The value when ending last time
441 Semi Auto/Manual The value when ending last time
442 Rain Adjust The value when ending last time
443 Auto/Manual The value when ending last time
444 Video The value when ending last time
445 Make AZ Acquisition Zone 1 – OFF
AZ Function (ON/OFF)
446 Acquisition Zone 1 – MAKE OFF
AZ 1 (Make mode ON/OFF)
447 Acquisition Zone 1 – The value when ending last time
Start Side:
448 Acquisition Zone 1 - End Side: The value when ending last time
Far Edge:
450 Acquisition Zone 1 - Width: The value when ending last time
451 Acquisition Zone 2 – OFF
AZ Function (ON/OFF)
452 Acquisition Zone 2 – MAKE OFF
AZ 2 (Make mode ON/OFF)
9 Reference 9-76
453 Main Make AZ Acquisition Zone 2 – The value when ending last time
Start Side:
454 Acquisition Zone 2 - End Side: The value when ending last time
Far Edge:
456 Acquisition Zone 2 - Width: The value when ending last time
457 File Manager Type Route File
458 Device (Left Side) Local Disk
459 Device (Right Side) Local Disk
460 Test - Alarm Log (Display Tab) The value when ending last time
461 Test - System Information Type Fixed Value
462 Display Unit Fixed Value
463 Maintenance No. Fixed Value
464 TCS Fixed Value
465 Test - Operating Time Operating Time - Display The value depended on the
system
466 Operating Time - HDD1 The value depended on the
system
467 Operating Time - HDD2 The value depended on the
system
468 Sensor Heading - Port (Use SRB/Use The value when ending last time
Local Port/Manual)
469 Heading - Source The value when ending last time
470 Heading - GYRO Setting The value when ending last time
471 Heading - Manual (Heading) The value when ending last time
472 STW - Port (Use SRB/Use The value when ending last time
Local Port/Manual)
473 STW - Source The value when ending last time ECDIS
474 STW - Manual (STW) The value when ending last time
475 POSN1 - Port (Use SRB/Use The value when ending last time
Local Port)
476 POSN1 - Source The value when ending last time
477 POSN2 - Port (Use SRB/Use The value when ending last time
Local Port)
478 POSN2 - Source The value when ending last time
479 Date - Source The value when ending last time
480 Time Zone - Source The value when ending last time
481 Date/Time Setting See "Main - Setting -
Date/Time Setting"
482 Code Input - -
9-77 9 Reference
483 Main Setting - Color and Brilliance Day/Night The value when ending last time
Setting
484 Color - User Dialog The value when ending last time
485 Color - Character The value when ending last time
486 Color - Target Symbol The value when ending last time
487 Brilliance - User Dialog The value when ending last time
488 Brilliance - Character The value when ending last time
489 Brilliance - Target Symbol The value when ending last time
490 Setting - Option Key Setting Option1 The value when ending last time
491 Option2 The value when ending last time
492 User The value when ending last time
493 Setting - Date/Time Setting Manual - LMT Date Current Date (LMT)
494 Manual - LMT Time Current Time (LMT)
495 Manual - Time Zone The value when ending last time
496 UTC/LMT The value when ending last time
497 Display Style The value when ending last time
498 Setting - Marker Setting Distance Unit Simultaneity The value when ending last time
499 EBL/VRM Step The value when ending last time
500 Cursor Read Out The value when ending last time
501 Setting - Logbook Setting Logging - At Noon (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
502 Logging - Every ** minutes The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
503 Logging - Every ** minutes The value when ending last time
(select time)
504 Logging - Route Alarm The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
505 Logging - Chart Alarm The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
506 Logging - Navtex (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
507 Logging - When press □ The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
508 Logging - AUTO Sail/Sensors The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
509 Logging - Others (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
510 View - At Noon (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
511 View - Specified Period The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
512 View - Route Alarm (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
513 View - Chart Alarm (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
514 View - Navtex (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
515 View - When press □ The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
516 View - AUTO Sail/Sensors The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
517 View - Others (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
518 View - Latest display days The value when ending last time
9 Reference 9-78
519 Main Setting - Logbook Setting Station - Filtering (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
520 (Navtex Setting) Station - A (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
521 Station - B (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
522 Station - C (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
523 Station - D (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
524 Station - E (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
525 Station - F (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
526 Station - G (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
527 Station - H (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
528 Station - I (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
529 Station - J (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
530 Station - K (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
531 Station - L (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
532 Station - M (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
533 Station - N (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
534 Station - O (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
535 Station - P (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
536 Station - Q (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
537 Station - R (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
538 Station - S (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
539 Station - T (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
540 Station - U (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
541 Station - V (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
542 Station - W (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
543 Station - X (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
544 Station - Y (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
545 Station - Z (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
ECDIS
546 Message - Filtering (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
547 Message - A (ON/OFF) ON (Fixed Display)
548 Message - B (ON/OFF) ON (Fixed Display)
549 Message - C (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
550 Message - D (ON/OFF) ON (Fixed Display)
551 Message - E (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
552 Message - F (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
553 Message - G (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
554 Message - H (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
555 Message - I (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
556 Message - J (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
557 Message - K (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
558 Message - L (ON/OFF) ON (Fixed Display)
559 Message - V (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
560 Message - W (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
561 Message - X (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
9-79 9 Reference
562 Main Setting - Logbook Setting Message - Y (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
563 (Navtex Setting) Message - Z (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
564 Month/Year The value when ending last time
565 Setting - Voyage Distance - -
Clear
566 Setting - Display Panel Display CTS (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
567 Option Display DEPTH (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
568 Analog Meter - Display HDG The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
569 Analog Meter - Display COG The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
570 Analog Meter - Display Drift The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
571 Analog Meter - Display CTS The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
572 Analog Meter - Display The value when ending last time
Indicator (ON/OFF)
573 Setting - Alarm Setting Difference between POSN1 The value when ending last time
(Limit) and POSN2 (ON/OFF)
574 Difference between POSN1 The value when ending last time
and POSN2 (Distance)
575 Shift of POSN1 (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
576 Shift of POSN1 (Distance) The value when ending last time
577 Off Course (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
578 Off Course (Bearing) The value when ending last time
579 Arrival Last WPT (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
580 Arrival Last WPT (Time) The value when ending last time
581 Timer (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
582 Timer (Time) The value when ending last time
583 Vector (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
584 Vector (Length) The value when ending last time
585 Vector (Length - Units) The value when ending last time
586 Vector (Width) The value when ending last time
587 Sector (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
588 Sector (Radius) The value when ending last time
589 Sector (Radius - Units) The value when ending last time
590 Sector (Width) The value when ending last time
591 Setting - Alarm Setting Traffic Separation Zone The value when ending last time
592 (Area) Traffic Crossing The value when ending last time
593 Traffic Roundabout The value when ending last time
594 Traffic Precautionary The value when ending last time
595 Two Way Traffic The value when ending last time
596 Deeper Water Route The value when ending last time
597 Recommended Traffic Lane The value when ending last time
9 Reference 9-80
598 Main Setting - Alarm Setting Inshore Traffic Zone The value when ending last time
599 (Area) Fairway The value when ending last time
600 Restricted Area The value when ending last time
601 Caution Area The value when ending last time
602 Offshore Production Area The value when ending last time
603 Military Practice Area The value when ending last time
604 Seaplane Landing Area The value when ending last time
605 Submarine Transit Area The value when ending last time
606 Ice Area The value when ending last time
607 Channel The value when ending last time
608 Fishing Ground The value when ending last time
609 Fishing Prohibited The value when ending last time
610 Pipeline Area The value when ending last time
611 Cable Area The value when ending last time
612 Anchorage Area The value when ending last time
613 Anchorage Prohibited The value when ending last time
614 Spoil Ground The value when ending last time
615 Dumping Ground The value when ending last time
616 Dredge Area The value when ending last time
617 Cargo Transshipment Area The value when ending last time
618 Incineration Area The value when ending last time
619 Specially Protected Area The value when ending last time
620 Setting - Buzzer Setting System Alarm The value when ending last time
621 Operation Miss The value when ending last time
622 Key Ack The value when ending last time
623 Setting Alarm The value when ending last time
624 Navigation Alarm - High The value when ending last time
ECDIS
625 Navigation Alarm - Mid The value when ending last time
626 Navigation Alarm - Low The value when ending last time
627 Servicem Line Monitor Select Device (blank)
628 an Select Port Local
629 Binary (ON/OFF) OFF
630 Installation - Installation Date The value when ending last time
631 Information Company The value when ending last time
632 Name The value when ending last time
633 Installation - CCRP Setting Length The value when ending last time
634 Beam The value when ending last time
635 GPS1 (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
636 GPS1 (X) The value when ending last time
637 GPS1 (Y) The value when ending last time
9-81 9 Reference
640 Servicem Installation - CCRP Setting GPS3 (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
641 an GPS3 (X) The value when ending last time
646 Radar Anntena1 (ON/OFF) The value when ending last time
647 Radar Anntena1 (X) The value when ending last time
648 Radar Anntena1 (Y) The value when ending last time
670 CCRP1 (X) The value when ending last time
671 CCRP1 (Y) The value when ending last time
678 CCRP (select point) The value when ending last time
679
9 Reference 9-82
680 Servicem Ship's parameter Length The value when ending last time
681 an Beam The value when ending last time
682 Maximum Course Change The value when ending last time
683 Maximum Speed Limit The value when ending last time
684 Minimum Speed Limit The value when ending last time
685 Maximum ROT The value when ending last time
686 Minimum ROT The value when ending last time
687 TCS Maintenance Reach Offset The value when ending last time
688 Safety / Limit Check The value when ending last time
(ON/OFF)
689 Time / Distance to WPT The value when ending last time
690 Radar Initial Setup Signal Processing - Echo The value when ending last time
Noise Level
691 Signal Processing - Setting The value when ending last time
Mode
692 MBS - MBS Level The value when ending last time
693 MBS - MBS Area The value when ending last time
694 Data Backup/Restore -
Backup
695 Data Backup/Restore -
Restore
ECDIS
9-83 9 Reference
10
Maintenance
and
Inspection
10-1
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off

the power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately

turn off the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.
Notes:
• Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene, alcohol, gasoline,
thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will cause the LCD surface to be
damaged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube
lightly.
• To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as thinner or
benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.
10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-2

10.1 Confirming Alarm
If a “HARD” alarm occurs, a hardware failure has been detected in this system.
Perform the following confirmation procedure:
The ECDIS Unit:

(1) Confirmation procedure
1) Display the alarm list and read the detailed
information.
(For how to display the alarm list, see 3.3.7 “How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])”.)
2) After reading the detailed information displayed in red, immediately perform the shutdown
process to turn off the power.
3) Ask the JRC sales representative or our local office for repair, reporting the alarm information.
(2) Explanation of hardware alarm messages

Fan(CPU) : The CPU fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
CPU High TEMP. : The CPU temperature has risen too high. (Repair needed)
Fan(Main PWR) : The power supply unit (CBD-1627) fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
Fan(ATX PWR) : The ATX power supply unit fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
Fan(LCD) : The monitor fan of the display panel’s chassis (CWB-1210) has
been stopped. (Repair needed)
DISK1 Error : Hard disk 1 has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK2 Error : Hard disk 2 has failed. (Repair needed)
ECDIS
10-3 10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.2 Daily Maintenance
The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily
maintenance. To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it
daily. This also prevents the unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.
Maintenance and Inspection Method

No. Item Inspection Item
1 Cleaning • Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth. In
particular, wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.
2 Inspection • Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
• Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the monitor to make sure that
the brightness of the monitor increases.
• Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
• Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure
that dials operate smoothly.
• Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the
lighting on the panel changes correctly.
• Select [Color Pattern] to display the color test pattern, and adjust the
brightness/contrast. Also make sure that the necessary colors come
out on the monitor.
• Select [Gray Scale] to display the gray scale pattern, and make sure that
the gray scale is displayed correctly.

10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)
The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select the “Color Pattern” in the startup menu.

The color pattern becomes activated.
[Startup Menu] [Color Pattern]
The color pattern can be displayed using any of the five color tables.
This color pattern is intended:
(a) For use by the mariner to check and if necessary re-adjust the brilliance and contrast
controls, particularly for use at night.
(b) For use by the mariner to satisfy himself that an again ECDIS CRT remains capable of
providing the necessary color differentiation.
(c) For initial color verification of the day-black-background, dusk and night color table.
2) Right-click to see the context menu.
ECDIS
Day Bright: A “day-time” color pattern will be displayed.

Day Whiteback: A “relatively bright” color pattern will be displayed.
Day Blackback: A color pattern against a “black background” will be displayed.
Dusk: A “relatively dark” color pattern will be displayed.
Night: A “night-time” color pattern will be displayed.
Exit: Exit the color pattern display and return to the startup menu.
3) Left-click on [Exit] from the context menu to exit the color pattern.

10.2.2 Gray Scale
A gray scale pattern is displayed to check the brightness adjustment of the monitor.
Optimum brightness of the monitor can be obtained by adjusting the brightness so that the gray scale
pattern can be viewed clearly. The brightness of the monitor in the nighttime can also be optimally
adjusted in the same way.
1) Select the “Gray Scale” in the startup menu.

The gray scale becomes activated.
[Startup Menu] [Gray Scale]
2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale. The startup menu will start up.
10.3 Replacing Consumables

The hard disk, UPS battery and LCD backlight used in this system have a limited service life, so that they
should better be replaced periodically.
The expected service lives of these parts if the system is used constantly are as follows:
Number Part Nominal life Remarks

1 Hard disk Two years When the power supply is on constantly.
2 UPS battery Five years When the power supply is on constantly. If the
system is not used for long periods and battery
charging/discharging is repeated, then the nominal life
may be shorter.
3 LCD backlight Five years When the power supply is on constantly.
Please consult with the store, sales agent or our branch office, sales offices or outlets for replacing the
above parts.

10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input
When AC power supply is stopped due to a blackout or the like, nothing is displayed on the monitor, but
the display information is backed up for one minute. If AC power is not supplied when one minute has
passed, the system will automatically start the shutdown process to terminate all the functions.
The following table shows the relations between the PWR FAIL lamp states and alarm sound while AC
power is not being supplied:
Inboard Backup Power Supply (24 VDC) PWR FAIL Lamp Alarm Sound
Connected Blinking *1 Yes *2
Not connected No change No
*1: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key changes the lamp state to “lighted.” The lamp goes off when AC
power is supplied.
*2: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key stops the alarm.
ECDIS

10.5 User Maintenance Menu
When you left-click the [ ] button on the startup menu and the following message is displayed, change
the setting of the user maintenance menu.
10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance

Menu
(1) Method of Displaying the User Maintenance Menu
1) Move the cursor onto the startup menu. And right-click.
2) Password is required.
3) Input “0000” as the password. And left-click the [OK].

4) The startup menu is expanded, and the user maintenance menu is displayed.
[<< Hide]
User maintenance menu is hidden.
[Disk Information/Backup]
Confirmation of Disk Information and
data can be backup.
[Hardware Key Information]

Hardware Key Information can be
confirmed.
[CD Cleaner]
DVD Drive can be cleaned with an
attached Cleaning CD.
(2) Method of Hiding the User Maintenance Menu

1) Left-click the [<< Hide].
ECDIS
2) The user maintenance menu is hidden.

10.5.2 Disk Information
In this function, drive information and file information can be confirmed.
10.5.2.1 Drive Information

Total capacity and free space of System, Master and Backup disk are displayed.
1) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] in user maintenance menu.
Then, the "Disk Information" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] tab.
3) Left-click the radio button of [Drive Information].
Then, the “Drive Information” is display.
System(C:)
Total: Total capacity of system
drive.
Free: Free space of system
drive.
Master(E:)
Total: Total capacity of master
drive.
Free: Free space of master
drive.
Backup(F:)
Total: Total capacity of Backup drive.
Free: Free space of Backup drive.
4) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the “Disk Information” panel.

10.5.2.2 File Information
Volumes of Chart, Logging Data, and User files saved in the system are displayed.
1) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.
Then, the "Disk Information" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [Disk Information] tab.
2) Left-click the radio button of [File Information].

Then, the “File Information” is display.
Chart:
Used space of each Chart
ECDIS
Logging Data:
Used space of each Logging Data
User Files:
Used space of each User Files
Master [MB]: Backup [MB]:

Each used space of Master drive. Each used space of Backup drive.
4) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the “Disk Information” panel.

10.5.3 Backup / Restore
In this function, the data in HDD can be backed up to the external USB device.
Do not turn off the power during Backup / Restore.

Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
10.5.3.1 How to Backup from HDD to USB device

1) Connect the backup destination USB device.
2) Left-click [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.
Then, the "Backup" panel will appear.

3) Left-click [Backup] tab.
Then, the “Backup” is display.
Drive letter
USB device name
4) Left-click the radio button of [Backup (HDD->USB)].

5) Select destination drive from drop-down box of [USB Drive:].
Note:
There is a possibility that the device is not recognized when the drive letter is not displayed.
In that case, please close the panel left-clicking [Cancel], and confirm the connection of the USB
device. And, try again from Procedure “2)”.

6) Select column that wants to backup
S-57/C-MAP ED.2 Charts:
Installed S-57 and C-MAP ED.2 charts can
be backup by selecting this column.
ARCS Charts:
Installed ARCS charts can be backup by
selecting this column.
C-MAP ED.3 Charts:

Installed C-MAP ED.3 charts can be backup
by selecting this column.
Logging Files:
Logging files can be backup by selecting
Routes, User Charts, Manual Updates, Marks:
this column.
Routes, User Charts, Manual Updates and Marks can be
backup by selecting this column.
7) Left-click the [OK].

Then, the “Confirmation” panel is display.
When [OK] is left-clicked, backup starts.

When [Cancel] is left-clicked, backup is canceled.

Then, the following screen is displayed and the backup is start.
ECDIS
9) When the backup ends, the following screens are displayed.

Then, returns to the “Backup” panel.
11) Left-click the [Cancel] to close “Backup” panel.

10.5.3.2 How to Restore from USB device to HDD
1) Connect the restore source USB device.
2) Left-click [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.
Then, the "Backup" panel will appear.
3) Left-click [Backup] tab.

Then, the “Backup” is display.
Device name is displayed here.
Drive letter is displayed here.
4) Left-click the radio button of [Restore (USB->HDD)].

5) Select source drive from drop-down box of [USB Drive:].
Note:
There is a possibility that the device is not recognized when the drive letter is not displayed.
In that case, please close the panel left-clicking [Cancel], and confirm the connection of the USB
device. And, try again from Procedure “2)”.

6) Select column that wants to restore.
S-57/C-MAP ED.2 Charts:
Installed S-57 and C-MAP ED.2 charts can
be restore by selecting this column.
ARCS Charts:
Installed ARCS charts can be restore by
selecting this column.
C-MAP ED.3 Charts:

Installed C-MAP ED.3 charts can be restore
by selecting this column.
Logging Files:
Logging files can be restore by selecting this
Routes, User Charts, Manual Updates, Marks:
column.
Routes, User Charts, Manual Updates, and Marks can
be restore by selecting this column.
7) Left-click the [OK].

Then, the “Confirmation” panel is display.
When [OK] is left-clicked, restore starts.

When [Cancel] is left-clicked, restore is canceled.

Then, the following screen is displayed and the restore is start.
ECDIS
9) When the restore ends, the following screens are displayed.

Then, returns to the “Backup” panel.
11) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the “Backup” panel.

10.5.4 Hardware Key Information
This function is useful for confirming User Permit No. and PIN No. And, information can be saved on the
floppy disk.
These information will be needed as purchasing ARCS chart and S-63 chart.
●How to Confirming / Saving Hardware Key Information

1) Left-click [Hardware Key Information] in User Maintenance menu.
Then, the “Hardware Key Information” panel is display.
Each information is displayed

here.
[Close]
Close this panel.
[Save to FD]
Hardware key information can
be saved on the floppy disk.
2) Insert an empty disk into the floppy disk drive.

3) Left-click the [Save to FD]
Then, save to floppy disk is started.
Note:
• Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.
4) When save is completed, left-click the [Close] to close the “Hardware Key Information” panel.

10.5.5 CD Cleaner
This function is DVD drive can be cleaned with an attached Cleaning CD.
Note:
• We recommend cleaning DVD Drive every month at least, otherwise system might be unable to
read Chart CD correctly, and fail to import/Update charts.
●How to Cleaning the DVD Drive

1) Cleaning CD is set in the DVD Drive.
2) Left-click [CD Cleaner] in User Maintenance menu.
When be displayed the following message, try to set Cleaning CD.
3) The following message is displayed, and the cleaning starts.

The cleaning stops when the message is close.
ECDIS
4) Left-click the [OK] to close the message and stop cleaning.

10.6 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before
you ask for repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is
not in order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.
Trouble
Symptom Cause Remedy
Power does not turn ON. The AC power is not ON. Turn the AC power ON.
The breaker in the main unit Turn the breaker ON. *
power supply is not ON.
When 220V input is being used, Switch the input protective
the input protective circuit switch circuit switch to AC 220V.
of the power supply is set to AC
110V.
AC power is not being input Input AC power within the rated
within the rated range. range.
The AC power cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected to the main unit. representative for repair.
Malfunction of main unit. Call the JRC sales
representative for repair.
“POWER FAIL” lamp is lit. DC power is not being supplied Supply DC power from the
from the distribution board. distribution board.
The AC voltage has dropped. Input AC voltage within the rated
range.
The main unit has Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned. representative for repair.
Lift the lever to turn the breaker ON
Breaker
ON: Up
OFF: Down

Trouble –continued--
“FAN” alarm message is The fan motor has stopped. Immediately turn the power OFF,
displayed on the LCD monitor. and contact the nearest JRC
office or agent, and ask for
repair.
Nothing is displayed on screen. The power switch is not ON. Turn the power switch ON.
The monitor has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales

The video cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected. representative for repair.
Incorrect display The video cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected. (terminal fault) representative for repair.
The display is shown out of The initial setup was faulty. For JAN-701, keep the brilliance
place. control pressed for a while. The
display will be adjusted
automatically.
For JAN-901M, press the
brilliance control. The display
will be adjusted automatically.
Radar echo is not displayed The video cable is not Call the JRC sales
correctly. connected. (terminal fault) representative for repair.
The connector cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected to the radar. representative for repair.
ECDIS
Chart Portfolio is working. Stop Chart Portfolio.
Gyro compass is not displayed, The initial setup has not been Carry out the initial setup
and "GYRO" alarm is carried out correctly. correctly.
displayed. The gyro compass is not ON. Turn the gyro compass ON.
The connector cable is not Check the connection between

connected to the gyro compass. the gyro compass and main unit.
The ratio setting on the gyro Set the ratio setting on the gyro
compass is incorrect. compass correctly.
The polarities of the connector Connect the cable at the correct
cable are incorrect. polarities.

Rudder angle is not displayed. The rudder angle indicator is not Turn the rudder angle indicator
Or, is not displayed correctly. ON. ON.
The ratio setting on the rudder Set the ratio setting on the
angle is incorrect. rudder angle.
The rudder angle indicator Set the rudder angle indicator
setting is incorrect. correctly.
connected to the rudder angle the rudder angle indicator and
indicator. the main unit.
Log is not displayed. The log is not ON. Turn the log ON.
The ratio setting on the log is Set the ratio setting on the log
incorrect. correctly.
connected to the log. the log and the main unit.
Data is not displayed, even The analog data setup has not Carry out the analog data setup
though the data below is input. been set correctly. correctly.
• Relative wind direction and The interface board is not ON. Turn the interface board ON.
wind speed
• Air temperature The connector cable is not Check the connection between
• Water temperature connected to the interface the interface board and the main
• Pitch board. unit.
• Roll The main unit has Call the JRC sales
• CPP angle malfunctioned. representative for repair.
Position information (e.g. GPS, The initial setup has not been Carry out the initial setup
gyro) is not displayed. carried out correctly. correctly.
The navigation unit is not Check the state of the navigation
measuring. unit.
The navigation unit is not ON. Turn the navigation unit ON.

connected to the navigation unit. the navigation unit and the main
unit.

ARPA is not displayed. The [ARPA] key is not pressed. Press the [ARPA] key.
The ARPA setting is incorrect. Set the ARPA setting correctly.
The radar is not turned ON. Turn the radar ON.

connected to the radar. the radar and main unit.
Wind direction, wind speed The digital wind direction and air Turn the digital wind direction
(digital wind direction and air speedometer are not ON. and air speedometer ON.
speedometer) are not The connector cables are not Check the connection between
displayed. connected to the digital wind the digital wind direction and air
direction and air speedometer. speedometer.
UKC is not displayed. The depth sounder is not ON. Turn the depth sounder ON.

connected to the depth sounder. the depth sounder and the main
unit.
Engine data from data logger The data logger is not ON. Turn the data logger ON.
and weather data are not
displayed. The connector cable is not Check the connection between
connected to the data logger. the main unit and the data
logger.
malfunctioned. representative for repair. ECDIS
Automatic sailing is not The initial setup has not been Carry out the initial setup
possible. carried out correctly. correctly.
Operation is not carried out Carry out the correct operation
correctly. referring to the Instruction
Manual.
The autopilot is not ON. Turn the autopilot ON.

connected to the autopilot. the autopilot and the main unit.

The brightness does not The lighting control circuit does Call the JRC sales
change even if the not work. representative for repair.
[BRILLIANCE] knob is turned. The cable is damaged. Call the JRC sales
None of the keys on the The cursor is displayed as an Wait until the hourglass returns
operation panel work. hourglass. to a cursor.
The operation panel circuit is Call the JRC sales
malfunctioning. representative for repair.
The trackball does not work. The trackball is dirty. Clean the trackball.

The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.
not work even if turned. Or, not ready for operation.
response is slow. The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft. secure the knob to the shaft.
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and Press the [RADAR] key.
[SEA/RAIN] dials do not work [SEA/RAIN] dials are not ready
even if turned. Or, response is for operation.
slow. The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft. secure the knob to the shaft.
When the [ ] (Navigation & Hard disk failure See 13.5 “User Maintenance
Planning) button in the startup Menu.”
menu, the message “Path is
incorrect or Master Drive is
failed” is displayed.
The power was turned off Chart index failure Start Chart Portfolio, select
during ARCS index creation by [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regenerate
Chart Portfolio, and Navigation Index] to create the chart index
& Planning cannot be started again.
with an error message being
displayed.

Error code (0XFFFFFFA) is Wrong authorization code was Input the proper authorization
displayed in Chart Portfolio. input. code you obtained again.
Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is Reading from CD-ROM was Clean the CD-ROM, and
displayed while ARCS chart is faulty. perform the import procedure
imported in Chart Portfolio. again. If the error persists, the
CD-ROM or CD-ROM drive may
be out of order.
Contact the distributor of the
chart to request for replacement
of CD-ROM, or contact the JRC
sales representative to request
repair of the CD-ROM drive.
When the [ ] (Navigation & Dongle (key lock device) is Call the JRC sales
Planning) button is left-clicked broken or the information of representative for repair.
in the startup menu, the Dongle and Software are not
message “ECDIS License matched.
Invalid” is displayed.
ARCS chart is not displayed. Chart is imported when the term Register the latest Chart Permit
of validity of ARCS has expired. within the expiration date, and
Chart Permit was registered then import ARCS chart.
when the term of validity of
ARCS has expired.
PIN input was canceled when Input PIN when starting
Navigation & Planning was Navigation & Planning, and
started. select ARCS chart. ([Menu] -
[Chart] - [Option] - [S57/C-MAP/
ARCS])
ARCS chart will not be Chart Permit type was changed Contact the retailer from whom
displayed, though it has been from trial version to regular ARCS was purchased to check
displayed normally by that time. contract. the details of the contract.
Details of contract were ECDIS
changed.
Alarm occurs frequently while ECDIS has detected the alarm
Check the details of the alarm.
ARCS chart is displayed. information regarding ARCS
See 10.2.1 “Alarm Information of
chart itself and displayed the
ARCS Chart”.
alarm.
Error message Index was not generated in Re-generate Index in Chart
“????Earcs.dll????” is Chart Portfolio for such reasons Portfolio. ([Chart] - [ARCS] -
displayed when Navigation & as forced termination of this [Regenerate Index])
Planning is started. equipment during ARCS Index
generation.

eToken panel is displayed in Navigation & It is an authentication Press Cancel button.
Planning or Chart Portfolio, and a password is procedure when C-MAP
demanded. security device (eToken)
is accessed.
Message “C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) C-MAP security device Press [POWER] to exit
not found” is displayed in Navigation & (eToken) was not software and OS, and
Planning. recognized. then, press [POWER]
again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message “System detected non response from C-MAP security device Press [POWER] to exit
security device (eToken),and needs to reboot. (eToken) was not software and OS, and
Please press [POWER] button shutdown.” is recognized. then, press [POWER]
displayed in Chart Portfolio. again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message “Confirm CD type, and retry “Auto A CD is not inserted in Insert the chart CD into
Detect”.” is displayed in Chart Portfolio. the CD-ROM drive. the CD-ROM drive.
The CD in the CD-ROM

drive is not a chart CD.

Message “CD is not inserted, or this CD might The path setting is Set the path correctly.
have errors. Confirm, or contact with your chart wrong.
provider.” is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not displayed. The eToken license is Register the latest valid
invalid. eToken license and
import C-MAP Ed.3
chart. (See 10.2.2 “Alarm
Information of C-MAP
Ed.3 Chart”.)
C-MAP Ed.3 chart that used to be displayed is The details of the Ask your C-MAP Ed.3
no longer displayed. license agreement have distributor for the details.
been changed.
“Startup Menu” is in hang-up state. C-MAP security device Install C-MAP security
(eToken) is not installed. device (eToken).
Message “error (0xFFFFFFFA)” or “Error: Bad Authorization code is Enter the received autho-
Authorization Code or file format error” is wrong. rization code again.
displayed in the log window of Chart Portfolio.
A chart list is not displayed with Chart Portfolio. Selectable Filter is set. Turn off Selectable Filter.
ECDIS
Message “Insert another C-MAP Ed.2 CD.” is Selected zones are not Select zones under
displayed in Chart Portfolio. under contract. contract, and import/
update data.
Message “error (0x000000xx)” is displayed in See 10.2.3 “Alarm See 10.2.3 “Alarm
the log window of Chart Portfolio. Information of S-57/S-63 Information of S-57/S-63
Chart”. Chart”.

Message “There is no licensed chart.” is This CD does not contain Insert the licensed CD
displayed in Chart Portfolio. any licensed charts. into the CD-ROM drive.
Message “Warning SA public key supplied on The selected SA Certifi- Select the SA Certificate
the ENC media unmatches the pre-installed SA cate file is incorrect. file relevant to the data
public key.” is displayed in Chart Portfolio. server.
Message “Errors occurred in Decryption! Refer Cell Permit is not Import correct Cell
the log to check the detail.” is displayed in imported yet. Permit.
Chart Portfolio.
Imported Cell Permit is
incorrect.
Cell Permit has been

deleted.
Cell Permit has already

expired.

11
After-Sales
Service
11-1
11.1 Maintenance Service
Your equipment is guaranteed for one year after it is delivered to you.
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts

The replacement parts for repairing this equipment (parts essential to keeping the functional integrity of
this equipment) will be retained for ten years after its production is discontinued.
11.3 When Asking for Service

When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.6 “Troubleshooting”, and check again. If
the problem still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales
department or subsidiary for advice.
In that case, use the “Repair Request Form” at the end of this manual.
• Repair during warranty period

Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and
instructions in the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge. However, breakdowns
resulting from abuse, negligence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.
• Repair after warranty period

Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the
client.
• Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number
11.4 Checks and Inspection

Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although
the rate of this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on
inspection, contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.
When you may not understand about after sales service, ask your dealer or our nearby sales department.
11 After-Sales Service 11-2

12
Disposal
12-1
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes
on their and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
12.1 Disposal of the Product

●Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries

Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
●Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
●Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the terminals with tape before
disposal. In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium
cells in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module

The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you
need to observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your
skin, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes.
If you find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the
liquid gets in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more
than 15 minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
12 Disposal 12-2
13
Specifications
13-1
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal
(1) Display 19 inch color LCD (JAN-701B)
23.1 inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (JAN-701B)
Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (JAN-901B)
(2) Operation panel Keys and switches

Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick
(3) Processor CPU mother board

Video board
Level interface board
8-channel serial interface A/B board
Gyro/log interface (NSK) board
Radar overlay board
Radar interface board
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
• Silicon disk
• Hard disk (Two-set component of main and sub)
• CD-ROM drive
• Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)
(4) Environmental conditions IEC60945 Ver4.0 compliant
(5) Power voltage Voltage : AC100V to 115V/AC200V to 230V (±10%)

Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz (±5%)
(6) Power consumption 330VA or less (JAN-701B)

350VA or less (JAN-901B)
13 Specifications 13-2
Index
Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR]) ......3-34
Ａ Displaying the Startup Menu......................3-176
Disposal of LCD Module ..............................13-2
Abbreviation for Geodetic System......... 10-13, 10-14 Disposal of the Product................................13-2
Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart ..............3-162 Disposal of Used Batteries ..........................13-2
Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only).................... 3-74
Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ..3-23 Ｅ
Alarm Fuction .............................................. 10-2
Alarm Information of ARCS Chart ............... 10-7 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor) ... 4-52
Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart..... 10-8 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) 4-29
Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart......... 10-9 Editing a User Chart...................5-14, 5-18, 5-24
ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only) 3-67 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2) ............... 8-93
Automatic Sailing Operation ......................... 6-6 Entering Objects ..........................................5-28
Automatic Sailing System ............................. 6-2 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio ..................... 8-2
Entering/Exiting the Playback ........................9-2
Ｂ Exporting Route Files.......................... 4-31, 4-54
Beam Bearing Line.................................... 3-143 Ｆ
Bearing Setting.............................................. 7-8
Bridge Display Terminal ................................... 14-2 Features.........................................................1-4
Button Functions ........................................... 5-8 File Manager ..................................................7-2
Filtering the Source Charts ..........................8-94
Ｃ Flowchart (Alternate Route).........................4-58
Flowchart (For Sailing).................................3-17
Calculating Distance to Run............... 3-85, 3-87 Flowchart (General) .....................................3-16
Canceling the Ship Offset ......................... 3-174 Flowchart (Graphic Editor) ...................................... 4-38
Change of Course (Turning) ......................... 6-2 Flowchart (Manual Update) .........................5-19
Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) ........ 3-70 Flowchart (Overview) ...................................8-20
Changing the Display Color ........................ 3-27 Flowchart (Table Editor)...............................4-14
Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Flowchart (User Chart) ..................................5-9
Only) ........................................................ 3-58 Function .........................................................1-2
Chart Abbreviations........................ 3-129, 3-161 Function of Operation Panel ..........................2-2
Chart Edit Mode ............................................ 5-3 Function of the Screen (ECDIS) ....................2-5
Chart Editing Menu ....................................... 5-4
Chart Portfolio Screen................................... 8-5 Ｇ
Chart-Related Alarm Information ................ 10-7
Checks and Inspection................................ 12-2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)
Clear Voyage Distance................................ 7-14 ................................................................... 4-34
Color Pattern (S-57) .....................................11-5 Graphic Editing Mode ..................................4-33
Color Test (ARCS Only) ....................... 7-6, 7-17 Gray Scale ...................................................11-6
Components.................................................. 1-5
Confirming Alarm..........................................11-3 Ｈ
Connection ................................7-18, 7-19, 7-21
Construction .................................................. 1-6 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation) 5-41
Creating a New User Chart..........................5-11 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only) . 3-67
Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials Highlighting ................................................ 3-111
.................................................................. 4-55 How to Enter Numbers and Letters .............3-12
Creating Alternate Route............................. 4-59 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) .3-28
Creating an Alternate Route........................ 4-58 How to Select the Menu.................................3-3
Cross Bearing ............................................3-115
Ｉ
Ｄ Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio ........8-26
Daily Maintenance........................................11-4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart .....................8-48
Danger Detection Vector and Sector ........ 3-140 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart ...........8-59
Data Formats of Files that ECDIS............. 10-19 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3 .....................8-68
Date Data Source Setting ............................. 7-9 Import/Update of S-63 Chart........................8-34
Display Panel ... 2-7, 2-8, 2-10, 2-12, 2-13, 2-15, Importing Route Files.......................... 4-30, 4-53
2-16, 2-17 Importing User Charts..................................5-17
Displaying a User Chart .............................. 3-88 Inputting Clearing Lines .............................3-117
Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice.3-73
Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position .3-54
Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only).. 3-72
Ｌ Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel3-83
Selecting the Route and the WP....................6-7
Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)3-71 Selecting the Startup Menu..........................3-20
Logbook .................................................... 3-130 Sensor............................................................7-7
Setting ARPA/AIS Options ............. 3-165, 3-170
Ｍ Setting Chart Fix Mode ................................3-63
Maintenance Service................................... 12-2 Setting Date/Time .............................. 7-13, 7-14
Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing) 4-40 Setting Radar Options ...............................3-164
Making a New Route File (Table Editor) ..... 4-16 Setting the Alarm Options ............................7-15
Maneuver Curve.........................................3-113 Setting the Automatic Sailing .........................6-4
Marking the Event Mark (EVENT)............. 3-107 Setting the Chart Options ..........................3-144
Marking the Information Mark ................... 3-109 Setting the Chart Portfolio............................8-97
Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ..................3-110 Setting the Route Options..............................4-4
Menu Operation ............................................ 3-3 Setting the User Key....................................7-12
Menu Title Bar ............................................. 2-18 Shifting Own Ship Position ........................3-172
Merging User Charts ................................... 5-16 Shifting the Chart .........................................3-51
Monitoring Dragging Anchor ..................... 3-105 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button...3-51
Multi View Screen ....................................... 3-78 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button .. 3-53
My Port List ................................................. 3-64 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor .....3-52
Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor ......3-53
Ship’s Shape..............................................3-138
Ｎ
Speed Setting.................................................7-9
Names and Functions ................................... 2-3 Start Automatic Sailing ...................................6-7
Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)3-21
Ｏ Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)....3-56
Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) .....3-57
Operating EBL/VRM............................ 3-47, 3-92 System Configuration...................................1-12
Operation when Editing User Charts ...........5-11 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations ... 3-49
Operation when Manually Updating Objects....... 5-20
Own Ship’s Setting ([Ship] - [Option]) ..................3-137 Ｔ
Ｐ Table Editing Menu and Button Functions .................4-9
Table Editing Mode ........................................4-8
Playing Back the Logging Data..................... 9-6 Terminating the Automatic Sailing..................6-8
Power OFF Operation ................................. 3-23 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input ..................11-7
Power ON.................................................... 3-19 Time Zone Data Source Setting...................7-10
Primary Position and Secondary Position.... 7-7, Track and Time Label Display....................3-142
7-19, 7-20 Troubleshooting .........................................11-10
Printing Display ......................................... 3-175 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA])
................................................................... 3-36
Ｒ
Reading Out Information on the Objects .................3-89 Ｕ
Replacing Consumables ..............................11-6 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio .......8-30
Retention Period of Repair Parts ................ 12-2 User Maintenance Menu..............................11-7
Route Monitoring and System Alarm ............ 6-3 User-Marking/Highlighting .........................3-107
Route Planning.............................................. 4-2 Using the Analog Meter ................. 3-125, 3-127
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor ... 4-33 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive..3-50
Route Planning Using the Table Editor ......... 4-8
Running Fix ............................................... 3-104 Ｖ
Ｓ Various Panels ...............................................3-9
Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary
Saving the Screen..................................... 3-175 Position...................................................3-139
Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)..... 3-71 View Operations...........................................8-95
Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only) ............ 3-66
Selecting an Area ........................................ 3-80 Ｗ
Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)
................................................................. 3-62 When Asking for Service..............................12-2
Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)......... 3-69 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......3-81
Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) 3-68
Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)..3-67 Ｚ
Selecting Motion Mode ............................... 3-62
Selecting Object Types ............................... 5-27 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band
Selecting ROUTE and To WP ..................... 3-83 (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..................................3-55
Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............3-56
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a
legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Japan
Radio Co., Ltd. (“JRC”) for the JRC ECDIS equipment that includes Microsoft
software products.
● You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by JRC from Microsoft
Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
●IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN
OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
●GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
¾ You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
¾ NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
¾ NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all
faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCUARACY,
AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE
DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
¾ Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java
technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as
online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct
life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead
directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems,
Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
¾ No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS
OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
¾ Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
¾ SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the
recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
¾ EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the
SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Repair Request Form
Date : . . .
To:
Mr/Ms
Reading
TEL
Point of
Repair
Contact
Requested by FAX
〒－
Address
Ship's Name Port Name
Product Name Product No.
Symptom: (in as much detail as possible)

Date of Malfunction: Malfunction Location:
(yyyy.mm.dd)
Desired Repair Repair On Site/ Desired
Method Repair at JRC Office Repair Date . . .
电子信息产品有害物资申明
日本无线株式会社
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements
of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited
有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements）
形式名(Type): JAN-901B 名称(Name): ECDIS
有毒有害物质或元素
部件名称 (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name) 铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)
主船内装置(Inboard Unit)
・显示装置(Display Unit)
× × × × ○ ○
主船内装置(Inboard
Unit) × ○ × × ○ ○
・键盘装置
Unit) × ○ × × ○ ○
・信号处理装置
外部设备(Peripherals)
・选择(Options)
・电线类(Cables)
× ○ × × ○ ○
・手册(Documennts)
○：表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11306-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
×：表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。
　　　(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
　　　 the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
JRC Code No. : 7ZPNA4056
RE: 中华人民共和国电子信息产品污染控制管理办法
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China
电子信息产品有害物资申明
日本无线株式会社
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements
of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited
有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements）
形式名(Type): JAN-701B 名称(Name): ECDIS
有毒有害物质或元素
部件名称 (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name) 铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)
主船内装置(Inboard Unit)
・显示装置(Display Unit)
× × × × ○ ○
Unit) × ○ × × ○ ○
・键盘装置
Unit) × ○ × × ○ ○
・信号处理装置
外部设备(Peripherals)
・选择(Options)
・电线类(Cables)
× ○ × × ○ ○
・手册(Documennts)
○：表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11306-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
×：表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。
　　　(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
　　　 the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
JRC Code No. : 7ZPNA4056
RE: 中华人民共和国电子信息产品污染控制管理办法
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China
JAN-701B/901B
JAN-701B/901B
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : tmsc@jrc.co.jp
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : service@jrcams.nl
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : service@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JUL. 2008 Edition 2 JRC Printed in Japan

Ecdis Jan 701B

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Ecdis Jan 701B

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

JAN-701B/901B

Not use the asbestos

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

☆Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

③ (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701B/901B ECDIS/Conning Display.

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

Examples of pictorial indication

The mark represents prohibition.

The ● mark represents instruction.

Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Do not use the offset function during navigation.

Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.

After changing the setting, execute to exit “Navigation & Planning”.

Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on

Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

● Do not place any object on the operation panel.

If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).Use of

Stand-alone type (JAN-701B)

ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

C-MAP Ed.2 : C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

CTS : Course to steer. Heading command.

COG : Course Over the Ground

Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.

Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.

EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines

ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD : Estimated Time of Departure

F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

HDG : Ship’s heading

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT : Local Mean Time

Primary : Main positioning sensor.

Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.

S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme

Scale : The display scale.

SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart

SOG : Speed Over the Ground

Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.

TCS : Track Control Systems

UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

UTC : Universal Time, Coordinated

VRM : Variable Range Markers

WOL : Wheel Over Line

WOP : Wheel Over Point

XTD : Cross Track Distance